2009 ridgeline - service express · pdf file2009 ridgeline owner’s manual ... your...

2009 RidgelineOwner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

© 2008 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-SJC-6300

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Ridgeline. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SJCC30

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０８／０６／０２　２１：３５：５０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００１　

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Honda Ridgeline was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０８／０６／０２　１９：４２：４３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

０８／０６／０２　１９：４２：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００３　

－

－－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

These signal words mean:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４２：５７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００４　

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. Your vehicle also has a shorterwheelbase, allowing it to respond quicker to the steering wheel than other sport utility vehicles with a longerwheelbase.

In addition to these characteristics, your vehicle’s pickup bed area allows you to carry more cargo and has the dual-action tailgate to handle the items easily.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

Overloading or improperly loading cargo could affect your handling and the vehicle’s stability, and could result in acrash. Make sure the cargo is properly loaded and all items are secured in the pickup bed area.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control or an accident.

268306Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iv

０８／０６／０２　１９：４３：０３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００５　

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(main controls)

(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)

(climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and HomeLink )

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

.......Instruments and Controls . 59

............................Features . 145

.......................................................................Before Driving . 247

.........................................................................................Driving . 267

.................................................Maintenance . 311

.........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 359

..............................................Technical Information . 385

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 403

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 407

IND

EX

1

０８／０６／０２　１９：４３：１２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００６　

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Technical Information

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information SummaryTaking Care of the Unexpected

Overview of Contents

2

０８／０６／０２　１９：４３：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００７　

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED: If equipped


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM

MIRROR CONTROLS

CENTER CONSOLE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAGGAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

PARKING BRAKERELEASE HANDLE

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

AUXILIARY INPUTJACK

REAR VIEW MIRROR WITHCOMPASS

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

(P.62)(P.76)

(P.132)

(P.134)

(P.103)

(P.128)

(P.252)

(P.249)

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL (P.132)

(P.136) (P.139)

(P.138)

(P.152)

(P.146)

(P.203)

(P.159)

(P.9, 25)(P.210)(P.9, 25)

０８／０６／０２　１９：４３：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００８　

＊＊＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

▲

▼

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

On models with navigation system.On models without navigation system.

1 :2 :3 :4 :5 :


4

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

HEADLIGHT CONTROL DIAL

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

HORN

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

SEAT HEATERS

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO ( ) BUTTONSELECT BUTTON

VTM-4 LOCK


INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

CRUISE CONTROLS

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

MULTI-CONTROL LEVER(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)

(P.98)

(P.94)

(P.202)

(P.95)

MOONROOF SWITCH(P.131)

FOG LIGHTS

(P.292)

BED LIGHT SWITCH(P.144)

(P.99)

(P.126)

(P.142)

(P.207)

(P.99)

(P.31)

(P.76)

(P.76)

(P.76)

(P.76)

(P.276)

SHIFT LEVER(P.271)

TRIP/RESET BUTTON(P.76)

(P.97)

(P.218)

INFO ( ) BUTTON

2

1

2

4

4

5

3

3

2

2

5

4

０８／０６／０２　１９：４３：４９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０００９　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 17.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 21

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 23......Airbag System Components . 23

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 30..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 31

.............................Airbag Service . 32...Additional Safety Precautions . 33

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 34

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 34

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 35

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 37

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 37

...Additional Safety Precautions . 38Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 39.......................Protecting Infants . 39

.........Protecting Small Children . 40.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 41....................Installing a Child Seat . 42

...............................With LATCH . 43.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46

..............................With a Tether . 48...........Protecting Larger Children . 51

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 51..................Using a Booster Seat . 52

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 53

...Additional Safety Precautions . 54.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 55

...................................Safety Labels . 56

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０８／０６／０２　１９：４３：５３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１０　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.While airbags can save lives, they

can cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).16

34 54

348

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

Important Safety Precautions

6

０８／０６／０２　１９：４４：０３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(7) (9) (1)

(2)(6)

(10)

(8)(5)

(2)

(11)(4)(3)(10)

(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(9) Door Locks(10) Side Airbags(11) Side Curtain Airbags

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column

０８／０６／０２　１９：４４：１０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１２　

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

The pickup bed is not equipped withseats or seat belts. Do not let anyoneride in the pickup bed as they caneasily be thrown out and be killed orseriously injured.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers


Seat Belts Why Wear Seat Belts

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Allowing passengers to ride inthe pickup bed or on the tailgatecan result in death or seriousinjury in a crash.

Make sure all passengers ridein a seat and wear a seat beltproperly.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４４：１８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１３　

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

25

28

CONTINUED


Airbags

What you should do:

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

０８／０６／０２　１９：４４：２７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１４　

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

30


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

０８／０６／０２　１９：４４：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１５　

－See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked. Before driving, be surethe tailgate is also closed.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate open indicator on

the instrument panel to indicatewhen any door or the tailgate is nottightly closed.

Your vehicle also has anIn-Bed Trunk open

indicator to show when the In-BedTrunk lid is not tightly closed (seepage ).

Your vehicle also has a tailgate, In-Bed Trunk, and door open indicatoron the multi-information display toindicate when the tailgate, the In-Bed Trunk, or a specific door is nottightly closed. You will see theappropriate indicator(s) andmessage(s) for each condition.

You will also hear a beep when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and each time you openany door, the tailgate, or the In-BedTrunk with the key in the ON (II)position.

Your vehicle also has atailgate and door open

indicator on the information displayto indicate when the tailgate or aspecific door is not tightly closed.You will see the appropriateindicator(s) for each condition.

34

75

54

CONTINUED

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０８／０６／０２　１９：４４：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１６　

When one or more doors are nottightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’message will come on.

When the In-Bed Trunk is not tightlyclosed, the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’message will come on.

When the tailgate is not tightlyclosed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’message will come on.


12

０８／０６／０２　１９：４４：４９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１７　

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

This vehicle has auto door locking/unlocking features. See page forhow to set them.

When the In-Bed Trunk, tailgate,and one or more doors are nottightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR, TRUNK& TAILGATE OPEN’’ message willcome on.

104

CONTINUED


Adjust the Front Seats2.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

０８／０６／０２　１９：４４：５６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１８　

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked into position. See page

for how to adjust the front seats.If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down (seepage ).99

119

On RT and Canadian DX and VP models


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４５：０４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００１９　

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isadjusted to its highest position.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.Have passengers adjust their head

restraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

See page for how to adjust themanual adjustable seat-back, andpage for the power adjustableseat-back.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

120

121

123


Adjust the Head Restraints4.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

15

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４５：１３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２０　

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４５：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２１　

CONTINUED

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

20


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

RELEASEBUTTONS

０８／０６／０２　１９：４５：２７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２２　

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Advice for Pregnant Women


18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４５：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２３　

If they do, they could be veryseriously injured in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe killed or very seriously injuredin a crash.

They could bekilled or injured in a crash, orbecome ill or even die from carbonmonoxide poisoning if engineexhaust enters the cap.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thearea in front of a folded-up rearseat.

Never let passengers ride in thepickup bed.

Never let passengers ride inside atruck cap (shell).

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０８／０６／０２　１９：４５：４３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２４　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object on the floor that istouching the rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened before

the beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

27 28

90


Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

20

０８／０６／０２　１９：４５：５３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２５　

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

46

16

CONTINUED

Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

０８／０６／０２　１９：４６：０３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２６　

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page

).

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.

30

344

do not deploy

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance


22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４６：１１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２７　

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

25

28

30

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System ComponentsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

(15)

(16)

(15)

(8)

(12)

(1)

(3)

(5)

(6)

(4)

(14)

(14)

(10)(13)(2)

(7)

(9) (11)

(5) (4)

(7)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(12) SRS Indicator(13) Side Curtain Airbags(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(16) Roll Rate Sensor

０８／０６／０２　１９：４６：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２８　

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or if your vehicle isabout to rollover.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

21

29

20

27

27

30

30

31

31


24

０８／０６／０２　１９：４６：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００２９　

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).27

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

０８／０６／０２　１９：４６：３９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３０　

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will deploy at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

latched


26

０８／０６／０２　１９：４６：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３１　

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.


Advanced AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０８／０６／０２　１９：４６：５６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３２　

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

31

345


How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

28

０８／０６／０２　１９：４７：０５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３３　

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

31


Side Airbag Cutoff SystemD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

29

０８／０６／０２　１９：４７：１２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３４　

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

A rollover sensor monitors thedegree and rate your vehicle may rollover and automatically deploy theside curtain airbags and activate thefront seat belt tensioners (see page

).

In a rollover toward the frontpassenger’s side of the vehicle, bothside curtain airbags will inflate andthe front seat belt tensioners willactivate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

21


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover

30

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０８／０６／０２　１９：４７：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３５　

CONTINUED

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

90

64

90




How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

U.S. Canada

Canada

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４７：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３６　

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.


Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

32

０８／０６／０２　１９：４７：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３７　

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

０８／０６／０２　１９：４７：５１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３８　

－

－－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children age 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

39 5051 54

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

34

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４７：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００３９　

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Children who ride in the back areless likely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children aged 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

31

51

CONTINUED


Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

０８／０６／０２　１９：４８：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４０　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.


Canadian Models

U.S. Models

36

SUN VISORS DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

０８／０６／０２　１９：４８：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４１　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

13

17

16

51

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

０８／０６／０２　１９：４８：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４２　

－

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


Children who play in vehiclescan accidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency In-BedTrunk opener and decide if yourchildren should be shown how touse this feature (see page ).

Opening orclosing the tailgate could causeaccidental injuries.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the windows,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

If a child wraps a loose

seat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

46 47

104117

Additional Safety Precautions


Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Lock all doors and the In-BedTrunk when your vehicle is not inuse.

Teach your children not to play onthe pickup bed.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

38

０８／０６／０２　１９：４８：３８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４３　

CONTINUED

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

０８／０６／０２　１９：４８：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４４　

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

40

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４８：５６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４５　

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into each rear seatingposition in the back seat.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

31

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

1.

2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０８／０６／０２　１９：４９：０５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４６　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

3.

42

０８／０６／０２　１９：４９：１３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４７　

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

When using the tether strap onthe child seat, attach the tetherstrap hook to the center tetheranchor before installing the childseat to the lower anchors for theLATCH system, because thecenter tether anchor is positionedbehind the child seat.

If needed, move the seat beltbuckle or tongue away from thelower anchors.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the rear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Whenever using the center tetheranchor point, make sure to pushdown the head restraint to the lowestposition, route the strap over theseat-back, then around the upperguide before attaching the tetherstrap hook to the center tetheranchor (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

48

CONTINUED

On the center seating position


Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

BUTTON UPPER GUIDE

CENTER TETHER ANCHOR

LATCHANCHORPOINTS

０８／０６／０２　１９：４９：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４８　

Make sure the head restraint is inthe lowest position. Lift the cover,then route the tether strap aroundthe upper guide. Route the tetherstrap downward properly, makingsure the strap is not twisted, thenattach the strap hook to the centertether anchor.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

5.

4.


44

Flexible typeRigid type

０８／０６／０２　１９：４９：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００４９　

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

over the seat-back and throughthe head restraint legs.Lift the cover, then route thetether strap around the upperguide. Route the tether strapdownward properly, making surethe strap is not twisted, thenattach the strap hook to the tetheranchor on the outside of the seatbottom (see page ).

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

6. 7.

8.

48

123

On the outer seating position


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

UPPER GUIDE

Outer Position

UPPER GUIDE

Center Position TETHER ANCHORTETHER ANCHOR

０８／０６／０２　１９：４９：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５０　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you intend to install the child seatin the rear center seating positionand use the tether strap foradditional security, make sure topush down the head restraint to thelowest position and hook the tetherstrap hook to the anchor beforesecuring the child seat with the lap/shoulder belt. Refer to page forhow to route the tether strapproperly.

1. 2.

3.

48

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


46

０８／０６／０２　１９：４９：４５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５１　

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

4. 5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

０８／０６／０２　１９：４９：５０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５２　

When using a tether anchor, alwayshook the tether strap through theupper guide to route it properly.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Each outer seating position has atether anchor at the outside of theseat bottom. The center seatingposition has a tether anchor betweenthe lower anchors for the LATCH-compatible child seat. Each anchorpoint is shown above.

Lift the cover, then hook thetether strap through the upperguide as shown.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat.

1.

2.

46


Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Using an Outer Tether Anchor

48

COVER

UPPERGUIDE

UPPER GUIDECENTERTETHERANCHOR

OUTERTETHERANCHOR

OUTER TETHER ANCHOR

０８／０６／０２　１９：４９：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５３　

Route the tether strap downwardproperly, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to theouter tether anchor on the outsideof the seat bottom.

Make sure to attach the tether straphook to the anchor before installingthe child seat, because the tetheranchor is positioned behind the childseat.

Place the child seat on the rearseat.

Push down the rear center headrestraint to the lowest position.

Route the tether strap over theseat-back, lift the cover, then hookthe tether strap through the upperguide as shown.

Route the tether strap downwardproperly along the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

3.

4.

CONTINUED


Using the Center Tether AnchorD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

49

UPPER GUIDE


０８／０６／０２　１９：５０：０８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５４　

Attach the tether strap hook to thecenter tether anchor between thelower anchors for the LATCH-compatible child seat.

Properly secure the child seat (seepage ), then tighten the tetherstrap according to the seat maker’sinstructions.

Whenever using the tether strap,make sure to route the strap throughthe upper guide before attaching thetether strap hook to the tetheranchor. If the tether strap is notrouted properly and secured, thechild seat may not be secured. Thiscould lead to serious injury or death.

5.

6.46


50

UPPER GUIDE


０８／０６／０２　１９：５０：１３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５５　

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt FitD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０８／０６／０２　１９：５０：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５６　

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

3.

4.

5.

41


Using a Booster Seat

52

０８／０６／０２　１９：５０：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５７　

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Supervise the child. Even a maturechild sometimes needs to bereminded to fasten the seat belt orsit properly.

16 51

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

０８／０６／０２　１９：５０：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５８　

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

54

０８／０６／０２　１９：５０：４５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００５９　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

With a truck cap installed and theback window open, engine exhaustmay enter the vehicle and cause ahazardous condition. Keep the backwindow tightly closed whenever youdrive with a truck cap installed.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０８／０６／０２　１９：５０：５３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６０　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

56

RADIATOR CAP

DASHBOARD

SUN VISOR

SUN VISORS

０８／０６／０２　１９：５１：０７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６１　

U.S. models Canadian models U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian modelsU.S. models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

57

HOOD DOORJAMBS

PICKUP BED

０８／０６／０２　１９：５１：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６２　

58

０８／０６／０２　１９：５１：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６３　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62.............................................Gauges . 76

..............Multi-Information Display .82Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 93........................Multi-Control Lever . 94

........................................Headlights . 95...............Headlight Control Dial . 95

........................................Fog Lights . 97........Instrument Panel Brightness . 98

.................Hazard Warning Button . 99..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 99

................................................Keys . 100......................Immobilizer System . 101

..............................Ignition Switch . 102....................................Door Locks . 103

............Childproof Door Locks . 104Auto Door Locking/

..............................Unlocking . 104.....................Remote Transmitter . 110.....................Dual-Action Tailgate . 113

.............................In-Bed Trunk . 116...............................................Seats . 119

..................................Seat Heaters . 126

............................Power Windows . 128.......................................Moonroof . 131

...............................Parking Brake . 132...........................................Mirrors . 133

.........Interior Convenience Items . 135.........................Center Console . 136

.......Console Compartments . 136.........................Cargo Hooks . 137

.....................Beverage Holders . 137..................................Glove Box . 138................................Coat Hooks . 138

....................Sunglasses Holder . 138........Accessory Power Sockets . 139

...................................Sun Visor . 140............................Vanity Mirror . 140

........................AC Power Outlet .141...............................Interior Lights . 142

.....................................Bed Lights . 144

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

TM

０８／０６／０２　１９：５１：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６４　

＊

＊

＊

: If equipped

Control Locations

60

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

GAUGES

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CENTER CONSOLE

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS


CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

PARKING BRAKERELEASE HANDLE

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

AUXILIARY INPUTJACK

(P.76)

(P.132)

(P.134)

(P.103)

(P.128)

(P.252)

(P.249) (P.132) (P.136) (P.139)

(P.138)

(P.152)

(P.146)

(P.203)

(P.159)(P.210)INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.62) REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH COMPASS

０８／０６／０２　１９：５１：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６５　

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

On models without navigation system.On models with navigation system.

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.1 :2 :3 : On RTS, RTL models, and Canadian EX-L models.

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

BACK WINDOW OPENINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

IN-BED TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR

(P.72)

(P.70)

(P.70)

(P.75)

(P.65)

(P.63)

(P.63)

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP (P.63)

(P.74)

(P.69)

(P.75)

(P.82)/INFORMATIONDISPLAY

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

(P.77)

(P.67)

(P.71)

(P.68)

(P.62)

(P.64)

(P.66)

(P.71)

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.64)

(P.67)

MESSAGEINDICATOR (P.74)

DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR (P.75)

WASHER LEVELINDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHTS INDICATOR

(P.67)

(P.67)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR (P.66)VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

(P.67)SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.68)HIGH BEAM

INDICATORLIGHTS ON INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR/TPMS INDICATOR

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR

(P.69)

(P.73)

2

1

1

3

2

０８／０６／０２　１９：５１：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６６　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

For more information, see page .20

20

90


Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

62

０８／０６／０２　１９：５２：０６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６７　

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

For more information, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ). For more information, seepage .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

375

90375

374

91

374

90


On models with navigation system On models with navigation system

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

０８／０６／０２　１９：５２：１４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６８　

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, rollover sensor,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver’s seat position sensor, or thefront passenger’s weight sensors.For more information, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

30

90

31

90



Side Airbag OffIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator


64

U.S. Canada

０８／０６／０２　１９：５２：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００６９　

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKEFLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

1.

2.

90

376

90



Parking Brakeand BrakeSystemIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

U.S. Canada

０８／０６／０２　１９：５２：２８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７０　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. With theindicator on, your vehicle still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock brakes. For more information,see page .

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willgo off if you have inserted a properlycoded ignition key. If it is not aproperly coded key, the indicator willblink and the engine will not start(see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

289

91

101338 340


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators


66

０８／０６／０２　１９：５２：３６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７１　

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemwith a circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the daytime runninglight circuit. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

You will see a ‘‘WASHER FLUIDLOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

95

207

207

330

91



High Beam Indicator Washer Level Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Daytime Running LightsIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

０８／０６／０２　１９：５２：４６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７２　

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 3.3 U.S. gal (12.5 ) of fuelremaining in the tank.

When the needle reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

You will also see a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.206

On models with navigation systemOn RTS, RTL models, and CanadianEX-L models

Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator


68

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０８／０６／０２　１９：５２：５４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７３　

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. It should come onfor a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it means the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen you turn the headlight controldial to either the or

position.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position without turning off theheadlight control dial, this indicatorremains on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMPHIGH’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).91


Lights On Indicator A/T TemperatureIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

Continuing to drive with the A/Ttemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

０８／０６／０２　１９：５３：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７４　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the 4WDsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked.

If the indicator blinks while driving,the VTM-4 fluid temperature is toohigh. Pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, shift to Park, and letthe engine idle until the indicatorgoes out.

291

91



Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VTM-4 Indicator

70

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

０８／０６／０２　１９：５３：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７５　

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

291

291

91

313

On models with navigation system Maintenance MinderIndicator

VSA Activation Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

０８／０６／０２　１９：５３：１７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７６　

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.


If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure on the tirepressure monitor, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). Refer to page

for more information.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.This indicator has two functions:

Check the tire pressure monitoron the multi-information displayand determine the cause (see page

).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on themulti-information display (seepage ).

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

1.383

278

282

91

361

On models without navigation system On models with navigation system

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator


72

０８／０６／０２　１９：５３：２７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７７　

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator and the tirepressure monitor will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.


If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure on the multi-information display, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,have the flat tire repaired as soon aspossible. If two or more tires areunderinflated, call a professionaltowing service. For moreinformation, see page .

If this indicator begins to flash,there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system(TPMS). You will also see a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. The indicator continues toflash for a while (approximately 1minute), then stays on. If thishappens, have your dealer checkthe system as soon as possible.For more information, see page

.

2.

383

284


Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

０８／０６／０２　１９：５３：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７８　

This indicator reminds you that thebed lights are on. With the shift leverin the Park position, they come onwhen you push the light switch onthe dashboard, swing open thetailgate, or open the In-Bed Trunk.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position without turning off the bedlights, this indicator will remain on,and then go off after 20 minutes. Seepage for more information.

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the dashboard (see page

) to see the message (see page).

8290

144


Bed Lights On IndicatorMessage Indicator


74

０８／０６／０２　１９：５３：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００７９　

This indicator reminds you that theback window is not completelyclosed when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position. With the ignition switch inthe ACCESSORY (I) position, it goesoff after about 30 seconds. With theignition switch in the LOCK (0)position, it goes off after about 3minutes.

If you remove the ignition key, turnoff the lights, and open the driver’sdoor without closing the backwindow, you will hear five beeps andsee the indicator blink. If you do notclose the back window before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsblinking but remains on. It will go offafter about 3 minutes. See page


This indicator reminds you that theIn-Bed Trunk is open. If you do notclose it, the indicator stays on forabout 3 minutes. See page formore information.

This indicator comes on if any dooror the tailgate is not closed tightly.

116

129

Back Window OpenIndicator

In-Bed Trunk OpenIndicator

Door and Tailgate OpenIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

０８／０６／０２　１９：５３：４８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８０　

▲

▼

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem, see page .

This shows how much fuel youhave. It may show slightly moreor less than the actual amount.

372

Gauges

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

76

U.S. model is shown.

INFORMATION DISPLAY



SPEEDOMETERTACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE

SELECTBUTTONTRIP/RESETBUTTON

FUEL GAUGE

SPEEDOMETERTACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE

SEL/RESETBUTTON

FUEL GAUGEMULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

INFO( )BUTTON

INFO( )BUTTON

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０８／０６／０２　１９：５３：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８１　

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the information displaychanges as shown on the next pageeach time you press the SELECTbutton or TRIP/RESET button.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, your lastselection display.

The information display shows theodometer, trip meter, engine oil life,outside temperature (if equipped),current fuel mileage, average fuelmileage, range (estimated distance),and maintenance item code(s).

For information about the multi-information display, see page .82

CONTINUED

On models without navigation systemOn models with navigation system

Gauges

Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

TRIP/RESET BUTTON

SELECT BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　１９：５４：０５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８２　

Gauges

78


INFORMATION DISPLAY OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

ODOMETERODOMETER

AVERAGE FUELMILEAGE A

RANGE

ENGINE OIL LIFE

CURRENTFUEL MILEAGE

CURRENTFUEL MILEAGE

TRIP METER A TRIP METER B

SELECT button

TRIP/RESET button

TRIP METER B

RANGE

TRIP METER B

AVERAGE FUELMILEAGE B

TRIP METER A

TRIP METER A

０８／０６／０２　１９：５４：１２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８３　

± ±

－－－－－－－－

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing

(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

This shows the outside temperaturein Fahrenheit (U.S. models), or inCelsius (Canadian models).

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

To adjust the outside temperatureindicator, press and hold the TRIP/RESET button for 10 seconds. Thefollowing sequence will appear for 1second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4,

3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the TRIP/RESET button. You should see thenew outside temperature displayed.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances. To reset a tripmeter, display it, and then press andhold the TRIP/RESET button untilthe number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the TRIP/RESET button repeatedly.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

CONTINUED

Except RT models

Odometer

Outside Temperature Indicator

Trip Meter

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　１９：５４：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８４　

This display shows the estimateddistance you can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank.

This distance is estimated from thefuel economy you have achievedover the last few miles (kilometers),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic condition, etc.

This display shows the current, orinstant fuel mileage you are getting.

It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)or l/100 km (Canada).

When either of the trip meters (tripA or B) is displayed, your vehicle’saverage fuel mileage since you lastreset that trip meter can be shownon the information display (mpg onU.S. models and l/100 km onCanadian models). This number isupdated once per 10 seconds. To seethe average fuel mileage, press andrelease the TRIP/RESET buttonrepeatedly.

The average fuel mileage will bereset when you reset the trip meter,or if the vehicle’s battery goes deador is disconnected.This indicator is displayed as the

system message on the multi-information display (see page ).

The appropriate tire indicator willcome on along with the low tirepressure indicator if a tire issignificantly underinflated or hassuddenly lost pressure. See

for what todo if this indicator comes on.

282


Gauges

Range (Estimated Distance)Tire Pressure Monitor Current Fuel Mileage

Average Fuel Mileage

LowTire Pressure Indicator

80

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR

０８／０６／０２　１９：５４：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８５　

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the SELECT button orTRIP/RESET button.

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

313

375

Maintenance Minder Check Fuel Cap Message

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

０８／０６／０２　１９：５４：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８６　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▼

▲ With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the multi-informationdisplay changes as shown in the nextpage each time you press the INFO( / ) button or SEL/RESETbutton.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, your lastselection is displayed.

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably. Others help to keepyou aware of the periodicmaintenance your vehicle needs forcontinued trouble-free driving.

To change the display, press theINFO ( / ) button on thedashboard repeatedly until the mainmenu appears (see page ).

When you open the driver’s door, a‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on themulti-information display.

In the multi-information display, thesystem message is also displayed(see page ).

83

90


Multi-Information Display

82

SEL/RESETBUTTON

INFO ( ) BUTTON

INFO ( ) BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　１９：５４：４８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８７　

▲ ▼


Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

INFO ( / ) button

SEL/RESET buttonU.S. model is shown.

(See page84)

Trip Computer (See page87)

Tire Pressure for each tire (See page86)

Go to HandsFree-Link Menu (See page86)

Go to Language Selection Menu (See page92)

０８／０６／０２　１９：５４：５３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８８　

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

When you reset Trip A, AVERAGEFUEL A, AVERAGE SPEED A, andELAPSED TIME A are reset at thesame time. When you reset Trip B,AVERAGE FUEL B, AVERAGESPEED B, and ELAPSED TIME Bare reset.


Odometer Trip Meter

84

TRIP METERODOMETER


０８／０６／０２　１９：５５：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００８９　

± ±

－－－－－－－－

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

To adjust the outside temperatureindicator, press and hold the SEL/RESET button for 10 seconds. Thefollowing sequence will appear for 1second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4,

3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the SEL/RESET button. You should see thenew outside temperature displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

This shows the outside temperaturein Fahrenheit (U.S. models), or inCelsius (Canadian models).

Outside Temperature


Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

NOTE:

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE


０８／０６／０２　１９：５５：０８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９０　

This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions. For more information,see page .

When the tire pressure monitor isshown on the multi-informationdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown.You can see the pressure of each tirein this monitor. If one or more tiresare low, inflate them to the correctpressure. For more information, seepage .

You can receive or make phone callsfrom your cell phone through yourvehicle’s BluetoothHandsFreeLink (HFL) systemwithout touching your cell phone.

313

282

Engine Oil Life Tire Pressure Monitor Bluetooth HandsFreeLink


86

ENGINE OIL LIFE

U.S.

Canada

０８／０６／０２　１９：５５：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９１　

▲ ▼

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to the HFL and howto receive or make phone calls, orvisit the handsfreelink.com website.

217

CONTINUED


Trip ComputerInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

Average Fuel Economy/Range

Average Vehicle Speed/Elapsed Time

SEL/RESET button

INFO ( / ) button

Instantaneous Fuel Mileage


０８／０６／０２　１９：５５：２２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９２　

This shows the time passed traveledsince you last reset it. When you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.

This shows your vehicle’s averagefuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)or liter/100 km (Canadian models)since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.

This shows the estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This distance isestimated from the fuel economyyou received over the last severalmiles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic, etc.

This shows the average speed youare traveling in miles per hour (mph)for U.S. models or kilometers perhour (km/h) for Canadian models.

This shows your current fuelmileage.

Along with the trip meter, the tripcomputer calculates these values:

Average Fuel EconomyRangeAverage Vehicle SpeedElapsed TimeInstantaneous fuel mileage

ELAPSED TIME A/BAVERAGE FUEL A/B

RANGE

AVERAGE SPEED A/B

INSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S.models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km(Canadian models)


88

０８／０６／０２　１９：５５：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９３　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example, the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when thesystem message comes on for thefirst time.

When there are several messages tobe shown, the system switches themessages every 5 seconds.The message is shown until youpush the INFO ( or ) button.To see the message again, press theINFO ( or ) button, 5 secondsafter the display disappears.

Here is a list of messages shown onthe multi-information display:

CONTINUED

System Messages


Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

０８／０６／０２　１９：５５：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９４　

See page11

See page20

See page20

See page30

See page31

See page132

See page376

See page376

See page374

See page375


90

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

０８／０６／０２　１９：５５：５２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９５　

See page374

See page289

See page291

See page281

See page282

See page69

See page271

See page330

See page68

See page97

See page319

See page250


Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

０８／０６／０２　１９：５６：０２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９６　

▲ ▼

Press the SEL/RESET button to seethe selections.

There are three language selectionsyou can make: English, Spanish, andFrench. To choose the language youwant, follow these instructions:

Press and release INFO ( / )button repeatedly to select the‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ display.

Select the desired language bypressing the SEL/RESET button,then enter your selection by pressingand holding the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display returns to the‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ display.


Language Selection

92

０８／０６／０２　１９：５６：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９７　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊＊

▲

▼

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

On models with navigation system.On models without navigation system.

1 :2 :3 :4 :5 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

MOONROOF SWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

HEADLIGHT CONTROL DIAL

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

HORN

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

SEAT HEATERS

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO ( ) BUTTONSELECT BUTTONTRIP/RESET BUTTON

SHIFT LEVER

VTM-4 LOCK


CRUISE CONTROLS

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

BED LIGHT SWITCHVOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

MULTI-CONTROL LEVER(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)

(P.98)

(P.131)

(P.94)

(P.202)

(P.95)

FOG LIGHTS (P.97)

(P.292)

(P.144)

(P.99)

(P.126)

(P.142)

(P.207)

(P.99)

(P.31)

(P.76)

(P.76)

(P.76)

(P.76)(P.76)

(P.271)

(P.276) INFO ( )BUTTON

(P.218)

2

2

1

2

4

4

55

3

3

2

4

０８／０６／０２　１９：５６：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９８　

－

－

OFFINT: IntermittentINT TIME ringLO: Low speedHI: High speedMISTWindshield washersTurn signalHigh beamsFlash high beams

The multi-control lever has manyfunctions, including windshieldwipers and washers, turn signals,headlight high beams, and headlighthigh beam flashing.

To select a position, turn the rotaryswitch, push the button on the end ofthe lever, or push the lever up, down,forward, or backward.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers run at high speeduntil you release the lever.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning theINT TIME ring. If you turn it tothe shortest delay, the wiperschange to low speed when thevehicle speed exceeds 12 mph(20 km/h).

Push thebutton on the end of themulti-control lever. Thewashers spray until yourelease the button. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweepafter you release the button.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

10.

OFF:

LO

HI

MIST:

INT:

Windshield Washer:

Multi-Control Lever

94

０８／０６／０２　１９：５６：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　００９９　

－

－

OFFParking and indicator lightsHeadlights

Push down on themulti-control lever to signal a leftturn and up to signal a right turn. Tosignal a lane change, push lightly onthe lever and hold it. The lever willreturn to center when you release itor complete a turn.

To turn on the highbeams, push the multi-control leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull the lever backto return to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Your vehicle has heating wires at thebottom of the windshield to helpheat the wiper blades and thewindshield. If the outsidetemperature is near freezing, theheater turns on automatically whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. The heater turnsoff automatically when the outsidetemperature is above freezing.

This function helps to increase wiperperformance when the wiper armssit in the parked position in snowy oricy conditions.

1.2.3.

67

CONTINUED

Headlight Control DialTurn Signal

High Beams

Automatic Heated Wiper Zone

Multi-Control Lever, Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

０８／０６／０２　１９：５６：３９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１００　

－ If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightcontrol dial on, but do not open thedoor, the lights will turn off after 10minutes.

Turning the dial tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, and license plate lights.

Turning the dial to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on and removethe key from the ignition switch, youwill hear a reminder chime when youopen the driver’s door.

When the dial is in the ‘‘ ’’ or‘‘ ’’ position, the lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

The automatic lighting off featureturns off the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door. The lights will turn on again when

you unlock or open the driver’s door.This feature activates if you leavethe headlight control dial in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, removethe key, then open and close thedriver’s door.

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHeadlights

Headlights

96

０８／０６／０２　１９：５６：４６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０１　

With the headlight control dial off,the daytime running lights come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and release theparking brake. They remain on untilyou turn the ignition switch off, evenif you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the headlight control dial.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the daytime runninglight circuit. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when you turn theheadlights off or onto high beam.

Turn the fog lights on and off bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button lights to show the foglights are on.

If equippedOn models with navigation systemDaytime Running Lights Fog Lights

Headlights, Fog Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

０８／０６／０２　１９：５６：５４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０２　

The dial on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of theinstrument panel lights and theconsole compartment light. Turn thedial to adjust the brightness.

The instrument panel will illuminatewhen you unlock and open thedriver’s door. The brightness willincrease when you insert the key inthe ignition switch.

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

The instrument panel brightness isdimmed when you turn the headlightcontrol dial to the ‘‘ ’’ or‘‘ ’’ position to reduce glare atnight. To cancel it, turn theinstrument panel brightness controldial upward fully until you hear aclick.

Instrument Panel Brightness

98

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS CONTROL DIAL

０８／０６／０２　１９：５７：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０３　

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Push the lever on the left side ofthe steering column all the waydown.

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

3.

4.1.

2.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０８／０６／０２　１９：５７：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０４　

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the glovebox locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

You can also keep the In-Bed Trunklocked by using the main switch inthe glove box (see page ).

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.

118

Keys

100

VALET KEY(LIGHT GRAY)

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

KEYNUMBERTAG

０８／０６／０２　１９：５７：１７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０５　

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

０８／０６／０２　１９：５７：２５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０６　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

102

０８／０６／０２　１９：５７：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０７　

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down, and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, andpush the lock tab down, or push thefront of the master switch, thenclose the door.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches will not lock, but theywill unlock. The lock feature is notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.Pushing the front of the switch onthe open passenger’s door will lockall doors and the In-Bed Trunk.

The lock tab on each door locks andunlocks that door. Pulling up on thedriver’s door lock tab only unlocksthe driver’s door. To unlock thedriver’s door and the In-Bed Trunkfrom the outside, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn it again, all thedoors unlock.

You can open or close the sidewindows by using the key in thedriver’s door (see page ).

To lock all doors and the In-BedTrunk, push the front of the masterdoor lock switch on either front door,press the lock tab down on thedriver’s door, or use the key on theoutside lock on the driver’s door. This vehicle has auto door locking/

unlocking features. See page forhow to set them.Pushing the rear of either master

door lock switch will unlock all of thedoors and the In-Bed Trunk.

130

104

Lockout Prevention

Power Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK TAB

０８／０６／０２　１９：５７：４１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０８　

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark (P) position.

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).This is the default setting.

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and theparking brake is applied. Make allsettings before you start driving.

With the auto door locking andunlocking, the In-Bed Trunk alsolocks and unlocks.

Auto Door Locking/UnlockingChildproof Door Locks Auto Door Locking

Door Locks

104

LOCK LEVER

０８／０６／０３　１４：４０：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１０９　

Locks all doors when the shift lever ismoved out of the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.


Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Door Locks

To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

To program the Park Lock mode:Instrum

entsand

Controls

105

０８／０６／０２　１９：５８：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１０　

Push and hold the brake pedal,and move the shift lever out of thePark (P) position.

Release the switch and, within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.Move the shift lever to the Park(P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).


Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.



1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

6.

3.

4.

Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speedreaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).

To program the Drive Lock mode:

Door Locks

106

０８／０６／０２　１９：５８：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１１　

CONTINUED

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.

The auto door unlocking feature hasfive possible settings:

The driver’s door unlocks whenyou move the shift lever to thePark (P) position.

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.


All doors unlock whenever youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

All doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to the Park (P)position.

This is the default setting.


Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

Door Locks

Auto Door UnlockingInstrum

entsand

Controls

107

０８／０６／０２　１９：５８：１９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１２　

－

－

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold down the switch:

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate the all doors unlockfeature.


Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate





1.

2.

4.

3.

1.

2.

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the shift lever is moved into thePark (P) position.

driver’s door unlockfeature.

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the ignition switch is moved out ofthe ON (II) position.

Door Locks

To program the Park Unlock mode: To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

108

０８／０６／０２　１９：５８：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１３　

－

－Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate the all doors unlockfeature.

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate the driver’s door unlockfeature.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Release the switch and, within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.Move the shift lever to the Park(P) position.


If your vehicle’s battery is removedor goes dead, the auto door lock/unlock setting is reset to thedeactivated mode.

Push and hold the brake pedal,then move the shift lever out ofthe Park (P) position.

5.

4.

6.

3.

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

０８／０６／０２　１９：５８：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１４　

－

－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door and theIn-Bed Trunk. Push it twice tounlock the remaining doors.Some exterior and interior lights willflash twice each time you push thebutton.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights, depending on the interiorlight control switch position, willcome on (see page ). If you donot open any door, the lights stay onfor about 30 seconds, then go out. Ifyou relock the doors and the In-BedTrunk with the remote transmitterbefore 30 seconds have elapsed, thelights will go off immediately.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the In-Bed Trunk.Some exterior and interior lights willflash once.When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the doors and In-BedTrunk are locked and the securitysystem (if equipped) has set. Thisbutton does not work if any door isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound, andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Panicmode does not work when the key isin the ignition switch.

If you do not open any door within 30seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock, and the security system sets(if equipped). The UNLOCK buttondoes not work when the key is in theignition switch.

You can also open all side windowsfrom outside the vehicle with theremote transmitter (see page ).

142

130

UNLOCK

LOCK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

110

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

０８／０６／０２　１９：５８：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１５　

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

To replace the battery:

Battery type: CR1616

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

SCREW

BATTERY

０８／０６／０２　１９：５８：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１６　

＋




Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.

Remote Transmitter

112

０８／０６／０２　１９：５９：０２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１７　

You can open the tailgate twodifferent ways:

Drop it open by using the upperhandle.

Swing it open by using the rightlower handle.

To drop open the tailgate, pull up theupper handle, then pull down thetailgate. To close the tailgate, pushfirmly up until it latches.

Before you open the tailgate adifferent way (dropped open, andthen swung open), make sure it isfully closed.

Make sure all passengers andobjects are clear of the tailgatebefore opening and closing it, andmake sure the tailgate is closedsecurely before driving.

As a safety feature, the upper handleis disabled if you do not fully closethe tailgate after it is swung open.And the lower handle is disabled ifyou do not fully close the tailgateafter it is dropped open.

CONTINUED

To Drop Open the Tailgate

Dual-Action Tailgate

Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

NOTE:

UPPER HANDLE

０８／０６／０２　１９：５９：１１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１８　

To swing open the tailgate, firstmake sure it is fully closed, then pullup the right lower handle, and swingthe tailgate to the left.To close, swing the tailgate back,and push it firmly until it is latched.

The dropped open tailgate can beused as an extended pickup bed.Make sure to secure the items in thepickup bed, and do not exceed themaximum allowable weight on thetailgate (see page ).

To turn the bed lights on or off, usethe bed light switch on thedashboard (see page ).

Before opening or closing thetailgate, check that passengers,especially children, are not in thetailgate’s path.

263

144

To Swing Open the Tailgate


114

HANDLESwinging the tailgate open orclosed while anyone is in itspath can cause serious injury.

Make sure all passengers areclear of the tailgate’s pathbefore opening or closing it.

Do not drive with the tailgate swungopen. This could damage the tailgate.

０８／０６／０２　１９：５９：１８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１１９　

See page for information oncargo loading and weight limits.

You can also store and lock items inthe In-Bed Trunk (see page ).

If you do not fasten the seat belt, youfirst hear the seat belt reminderalarm, then the tailgate reminderbeeper sounds.

The indicator does not monitor thetailgate when it is dropped open.

Do not allow anyone to hang on theswung open tailgate. This coulddamage the tailgate.

Do not leave the tailgate swung open.The tailgate may swing and shutaccidentally. This could causeserious injuries.

The bed lights come on when youswing open the tailgate. You can alsoturn the bed lights on or off bypushing the bed light switch on thedashboard (see page ).

If the tailgate is swung open or notclosed tightly when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position, youwill hear six beeps and see theindicator blinking. The indicatorstays on until you close the tailgate.The beeper also sounds and theindicator blinks when you move theshift lever out of the Park or neutralposition.

This indicator is in the door andtailgate open monitor on theinstrument panel. It comes on whenthe tailgate is swung open or it is notcompletely closed. This indicatorworks even if the key is not in theignition switch.

The tailgate open indicator appearson the multi-information display (seepage ).11

144

259

116



Loading Cargo

Tailgate Open Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

０８／０６／０２　１９：５９：２７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２０　

You can open the In-Bed Trunk twodifferent ways:

Push the release button on thelower right side of the In-BedTrunk lid when the driver’s door isunlocked.

To close the In-Bed Trunk, lower thelid, then press down on the backedge.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, therelease button on the In-Bed Trunklid is disabled. To open the In-BedTrunk, use the master key.

Use the master key to open theIn-Bed Trunk when the driver’sdoor is locked.

The bed lights come on when youopen the In-Bed Trunk. You can alsoturn the bed lights on or off bypushing the bed light switch on thedashboard (see page ).

You can store items in the In-BedTrunk up to 300 lbs (136 kg). Do notexceed this weight limit, or you maydamage the In-Bed Trunk. See page

for information on loading cargoand weight limits.

To store items separately in theIn-Bed Trunk, optional dividerguides are available from your dealer.

When the In-Bed Trunk is closedsecurely, it can be locked orunlocked along with the power doorlocks (see page ).

144

259

103

In-Bed Trunk

116

RELEASEBUTTON

TM

０８／０６／０２　１９：５９：３６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２１　

To avoid damaging the key and keycylinder of the In-Bed Trunk lid, donot close the tailgate when the key isin the lid.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the latch of theIn-Bed Trunk lid so it can be openedfrom the inside. To open the In-BedTrunk, push the release lever in thedirection of the arrow.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .

To avoid damaging the seal on theIn-Bed Trunk lid, remove any debrisfrom the lid’s mating surface beforeyou close it.

To avoid damaging the bottom of theIn-Bed Trunk, do not drive over largeobstacles, and do not use it as ajacking point to raise the vehicle.

To avoid damaging the In-Bed Trunklid, and to prevent items from beingthrown about the vehicle andpossibly hurting someone in anaccident or sudden stop, be sure theIn-Bed Trunk lid is securely closedbefore driving away.

This indicator on the instrumentpanel reminds you that the In-BedTrunk is open (see page ).75

38

Emergency Opener

In-Bed Trunk OpenIndicator

In-Bed Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

117

RELEASE LEVER

TM

０８／０６／０２　１９：５９：４５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２２　

There are two cargo hooks forplastic grocery bags at the back ofthe In-Bed Trunk. They are designedto hold light items. Heavy objectsmay damage the hooks.

To protect items in the In-Bed Trunk,you can disable its release button byturning off the main switch in theglove box and locking the glove boxwith the master key.

Even if the main switch is in the OFFposition, you can open the In-BedTrunk with the master key.

When you are finished washing theIn-Bed Trunk, dry it with a soft cloth,and reinstall the drain plug.

You can wash the inside of theIn-Bed Trunk with a water and milddetergent solution, and a soft brushor cloth.

To drain water from the In-BedTrunk, remove the drain plug byturning it counterclockwise.

Cargo HooksWashing the In-Bed TrunkIn-Bed Trunk Main Switch

In-Bed Trunk

118

DRAIN PLUG

CARGO HOOKSMAIN SWITCH

TM

０８／０６／０２　１９：５９：５４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２３　

－

The front passenger’s seat in allmodels adjusts manually.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

On RT and Canadian DX and VP models13 15

CONTINUED

Manual Seat Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

119

０８／０６／０２　２０：００：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２４　

Make sure to pull the lever upwardor downward to its full range.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

On RT and Canadian DX and VP models

Seats

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

120

０８／０６／０２　２０：００：０６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２５　

－

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

The controls for the poweradjustable driver’s seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the seat with the ignitionswitch in any position. Make all seatadjustments before you start driving.

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.

Moves the front of theseat up or down.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.(RTL and Canadian EX-Lmodels)

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

13 15

On RTS, RTL and Canadian EX-Lmodels

Power Seat Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

121

０８／０６／０３　１４：０５：５１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２６　

Make sure your passenger’s handsor fingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to the desired position.

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seats. Pivot itdown to use it.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

15Armrests Head Restraints

Seats

122

FRONT REAR

０８／０６／０２　２０：００：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２７　

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isproperly positioned.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

CONTINUED

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

123

RELEASE BUTTON

Rear Center Position

RELEASE BUTTON

CUSHION

SEAT-BACK

LEGS

CUSHION

LEGS

０８／０６／０２　２０：００：３１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２８　

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupantsagainst whiplash and injuries to theneck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

Seats

Active Head Restraints

124

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

０８／０６／０２　２０：００：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１２９　

CONTINUED

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

The left and right rear seat cushionscan be lifted up separately to makeroom for cargo.

To fold a rear seat cushion, pull upthe lever on the outside of thecushion. The seat cushion pops up,and the seat legs store underneath it.Push the cushion firmly against theseat-back to lock it in place.

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold up the seat cushion.

Folding the Rear Seats

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

125

０８／０６／０２　２０：００：４６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３０　

If equipped

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

You can also store small items underthe rear seats. Make sure to securethe items so they will not shift whileyou are driving.

To return the seat cushion to itsoriginal position, pull the leveroutward, then push down the seatcushion slowly.

Make sure the seat cushion is lockedsecurely and the seat legs arepositioned properly in the floor guide.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag cutoff system,there is no heater in the passenger’sseat-back. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position to use theheaters.

259

Seat Heaters

Carrying Cargo

Seats, Seat Heaters

126

Passenger’sSeat

Driver’sSeatHEATERS

LEGS

FLOOR GUIDE

０８／０６／０２　２０：００：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３１　

Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Push the top of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

Seat Heaters

Instruments

andC

ontrols

127

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

０８／０６／０２　２０：０１：０１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３２　

－

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anyside window, or open and close theback window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Pull back on theswitch and hold it to close thewindow.

The windows operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically go upor down all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the passenger windows and the backwindow cannot be raised or lowered.

To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

AUTO

Power Windows

128

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

BACK WINDOWSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０８／０６／０２　２０：０１：０７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３３　

－ If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

Your vehicle has a power backwindow.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch from the ON(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) position without closingthe back window. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, the indicator goes off afterabout 30 seconds. With the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) position, theindicator goes off after about 3minutes.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function may be disabled. Ifthe AUTO function is disabled, thepower window system will need to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

AUTO REVERSE Back Window

Back Window OpenIndicator

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

129

０８／０６／０２　２０：０１：１６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３４　

To open:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

You can open all of the side windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour side windows start to open.To stop the windows, release thebutton.

You can open and close the sidewindows with the key in the driver’sdoor lock.

The back window is not designed tocarry long items through it. Do notuse the opened back window as acargo area pass-through.

If you remove the ignition key andopen the driver’s door withoutclosing the back window, you hearfive beeps and see the indicator blink.If you do not close the back windowbefore the beeper stops, theindicator stops blinking but remainson. It will go off after about 3minutes (see page ).

To open the windows further,press the button again, withinabout 3 seconds.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

75

Opening the Side Windows withthe Remote Transmitter

Opening/Closing the SideWindows with the Key

Power Windows

130

Open

Close

UNLOCK BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：０１：２６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３５　

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four side windows startto open. To stop the windows,release the key.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can slide back intothe roof. Use the switch near the leftdashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.

If the windows stop beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

To close:

If the windows stop beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All four sidewindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

1.

2.

3.

4.3.

4.

If equipped

CONTINUED

Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof

Instruments

andC

ontrols

131

NOTE:

NOTE:

MOONROOF SWITCH

０８／０６／０２　２０：０１：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３６　

You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthis function.

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, pull the release handlefully. The parking brake indicator onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased (see page ).

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center part of theswitch ( ). To close themoonroof, press and hold the upperpart of the switch ( ). To openthe moonroof, press and hold thelower part of the switch ( ).Release the switch when themoonroof gets to the desiredposition.

Make sure everyone’s hands areaway from the moonroof beforeopening or closing it.

65

Parking Brake

Moonroof, Parking Brake

132

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

RELEASEHANDLE

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

０８／０６／０２　２０：０１：４６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３７　

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The rear view mirror has a compassfunction to indicate the vehicle’sdirection.Refer to on page .

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).90

210

If equipped


CONTINUED

Mirrors

Compass

Parking Brake, Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

133

TABDriving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０８／０６／０２　２０：０１：５４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３８　

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

2.

3.

4.

If equipped

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors

Mirrors

134

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

０８／０６／０２　２０：０２：０２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１３９　

＊

＊

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments

andC

ontrols

135

GLOVE BOX

VANITY MIRROR SUN VISOR CENTER CONSOLE

BEVERAGE HOLDER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

COAT HOOK

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

SUNGLASSESHOLDER

CENTER UPPERPOCKET

CENTER POCKET

CENTER LOWER POCKET BEVERAGE HOLDERS

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKETS

: On vehicle without navigation system

０８／０６／０２　２０：０２：０７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４０　

Your vehicle has a multi-functioncenter console. It includes beverageholders, storage compartments, anarmrest, a coin holder, and a storagetray.

The center console maincompartment is under the tray andthe beverage holder. You can accessthe main compartment in two ways(front or rear).

To open the front of thecompartment, squeeze the knob, andpush it forward while sliding thebeverage holder. To close, squeezethe knob and pull the compartmentbackward until the beverage holderlatches.

To open the rear of the compartment,push the button at the end of thetray, then slide the tray forward. Toclose, slide the tray back in place.

The console compartment lightcomes on when the instrument panellights are on.

There are two removable partitionsin the main compartment. Thepartitions can be used to divide themain compartment, or can be storedat the front of the compartment.

Center Console Console Compartments


136

０８／０６／０２　２０：０２：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４１　

You can put small items in the upperconsole compartment. To use it, pullup on the lever and lift up thearmrest. Spilled liquids can damage the

upholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

There are two cargo hooks forplastic grocery bags at the back ofthe center console. They aredesigned to hold light items. Heavyobjects may damage the hooks.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door panel beverageholders when you close the doors.Use only resealable containers in thedoor beverage holders.

The center console has two beverageholders on the front. Your vehiclealso has beverage holders in the rearseat armrest and the rear doorpanels.

The upper console compartment hasa removable coin holder. Pull thecoin holder straight up to remove it.To install it, push it down along theguides on the side of thecompartment.

Beverage HoldersCargo Hooks


Instruments

andC

ontrols

137

CARGO HOOKSCOIN HOLDER

０８／０６／０２　２０：０２：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４２　

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

These hooks are not designed forlarge or heavy items.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the rear edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

Open the glove box by pulling up onthe handle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

Glove Box Sunglasses HolderCoat Hooks


138

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０８／０６／０２　２０：０２：３２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４３　

There are three accessory powersockets in your vehicle. Twoaccessory power sockets are abovethe center pocket on the dashboard,and another is on the back of thecenter console.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When both sockets arebeing used, the combined powerrating of the accessories should be120 watts or less (10 amps).

Accessory Power Sockets


Instruments

andC

ontrols

139

FRONT REAR

０８／０６／０２　２０：０２：３９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４４　

Pull up the vanity mirror cover to useit.

The light comes on when you pull upthe cover.

The light will not come on if the sunvisor is slid outward.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.Do not use the extended sun visorover the inside mirror.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror


140

SUN VISOR

Slide

０８／０６／０２　２０：０２：４６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４５　

Always run the engine when you usethe AC power outlet.

The maximum capacity for thispower outlet is 115 volt AC at 100watts or less. If you use an appliancewhich requires more than 100 watts,it automatically stops supplying thepower. If this happens, turn theignition switch off and turn it onagain.

The AC power outlet is notdesigned for electric applianceswhich require high initial peakwattage such as cathode-ray tubetype televisions, refrigerators,electric pumps, etc. It is also notsuitable for devices that processprecise data such as medicalequipment or measuring instruments.Any appliances that require anextremely stable power supply suchas microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,should not be connected to thisoutlet.

There is a 115 volt AC power outletinside the front consolecompartment. To use the AC poweroutlet, open the lids and open theoutlet cover. Insert the plug into thereceptacle slightly, turn it 90°clockwise, then push in the plug allthe way.

On RTL and Canadian EX-L


AC Power OutletInstrum

entsand

Controls

141

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：０２：５２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４６　

When the interior light control switch isin the ON position:

When the switch is in the OFF position:When the switch is in the door position:

None of the lights come on when adoor is opened.

The map lights in the front can beturned on and off by pushing eachlens. The rear map lights cannotbe used.

All the individual map lights andthe rear console light come on andstay on as long as the switchremains in the ON position.

The individual map lights and therear console light come on whenany door is opened, or when theremote transmitter or the key isused to unlock the doors. Whenthe doors are closed, eachindividual map light can be turnedon and off by pushing the lens.

The lights fade out about 30seconds after all the doors areclosed.

With any door left open and thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, the lights stay on about 3minutes, then go out.

Interior Light Control Switch

Interior Lights

142

ON

OFF

DOOR POSITION

０８／０６／０２　２０：０３：０１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４７　

Turn on a front individual map lightby pushing the lens. Push the lensagain to turn it off. With the interiorlight control switch in the doorposition, a rear map light can beturned on by pushing the lens. Pushthe lens again to turn it off.

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when you open that door.The light around the ignition switchonly comes on when you open thedriver’s door. After you close thedoor, the ignition switch light fadesout in about 30 seconds.

The courtesy light in the back of thecenter console comes on when youopen any door with the interior lightcontrol switch in the door position.After you close the doors, the lightfades out.

The map lights stay on when theinterior light control switch is in thedoor position and the map lightswitch is on.

The courtesy light between the frontmap lights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the instrumentpanel brightness control dial on thedashboard (see page ).98

If equipped

Individual Map Lights Individual Interior Lights Courtesy Light

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

143

０８／０６／０２　２０：０３：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４８　

If you turn the ignition switch toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)without turning off the bed lights,the lights and the indicator willremain on, then go off after 20minutes (see page ).

Your vehicle has bed lights in thepickup bed: a light on each frontupper and rear bottom side. With theshift lever in the Park position, thebed lights come on when you pushthe bed light switch on thedashboard, swing open the tailgate,or open the In-Bed Trunk. Theindicator on the instrument panelalso comes on to remind you that thebed lights are on.

To turn off the lights, push the lightswitch again, or close the tailgateand the In-Bed Trunk.

When you move the shift lever out ofthe Park position, the bed lights gooff and cannot be used.

74

Bed Lights

144

BED LIGHT SWITCH

０８／０６／０２　２０：０３：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１４９　

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

The climate control system and theaudio system have a voice controlfeature. Refer to the navigationsystem manual for more information.

..............Vents, Heating and A/C . 146...............Climate Control System . 152

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 159............AM/FM Radio Reception . 165

.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 167...................................Playing CDs . 173

.......................................CD Player . 175CD Changer

(Models without navigation..................................system) . 181

CD Changer(Models with navigation

..................................system) . 189....................Protecting Your CDs . 198

CD Player/Changer Error...................................Messages . 201

................Remote Audio Controls . 202......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 203

.................Radio Theft Protection . 204..........................Setting the Clock . 205

............................Security System . 206...............................Cruise Control . 207

.........................................Compass . 210HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 213.......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 217

...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 246

On RTS, RTL models, and CanadianEX-L models


Features

Features

145

０８／０６／０２　２０：０３：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５０　

See page for automatic climatecontrol and semi-automatic operationinformation.

152


Vents, Heating, and A/C

146

FAN CONTROL DIAL MAX A/C BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

MODE BUTTONS

MODE BUTTONS

RT, Canadian DX, and VP models

０８／０６／０２　２０：０３：２６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５１　

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.


Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation ButtonFan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Features

147

０８／０６／０２　２０：０３：３５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５２　

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the center,corner, and rear vents in thedashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard, rear andthe floor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

When you switch to from, the A/C stays on, and you

can turn it on and off manually.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches toRecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.


Mode Control Windshield Defroster Button MAX A/C Button

148

０８／０６／０２　２０：０３：４６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５３　

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red mark,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.

Select .

Make sure the temperature is setto the lower limit.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. You will see A/C ON inthe display.

Set the fan to the desired speed.

The ventilation system draws inoutside air, circulates it through theinterior, then exhausts it throughvents near the back window.

1.2.

3.

4.5.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.3.4.

76

CONTINUED


Using the A/CVentilation Using the HeaterF

eatures

149

０８／０６／０２　２０：０３：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５４　

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

Turn the fan on.Press the A/C button.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C ON indicator will not bedisplayed if it was off to start with.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C turns off. Butif it was on to start with, it stays on.



1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the interior is very warm,


To Defog and Defrost

Dehumidify the Interior

Automatic Heated Wiper Zone

150

０８／０６／０２　２０：０４：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５５　

Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.The A/C ON indicator will not bedisplayed if it was off to start with.Select .

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

You can adjust the direction of theair coming from the rear vents in theback of the center console bymoving the tab in the center of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

You can also adjust the amount ofairflow by turning the dial betweenthe vents.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to(passenger’s side) or below it(driver’s side). This will send morewarm air to the windshield defrostervents. Once the windshield is clear,select fresh air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.

2.

3.

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

To Turn Everything Off Rear Ventilation


Features

151

DIAL

TABS

０８／０６／０２　２０：０４：１９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５６　

The climate control system can alsobe operated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

On models with navigation systemVoice Control System

Climate Control System

152

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

ON/OFF BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

RTS, RTL, and Canadian EX-L models

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

０８／０６／０２　２０：０４：２５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５７　

The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle picks theproper combination of airconditioning, heating, and ventilationto maintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and airflow levels.

Press the Auto button on the frontcontrol panel. You will see AUTOin the system display.

Adjust the temperature for thedriver’s and passenger’s sideseparately, using the desiredtemperature control dial.

The passenger’s side temperaturesetting does not synchronize to thedriver’s side at any time except whenthe system is in the defroster mode(see page ).

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set either sidetemperature to its lower limit( ) or its upper limit ( ),the system runs at full cooling orheating only. It does not regulate theinterior temperature.

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

The driver’s and passenger’s sidetemperatures should always be setseparately. Turn the desired dialclockwise to increase the airflowtemperature of that side, andcounterclockwise to decrease it.

1.

2.

155

CONTINUED

Using Automatic Climate Control

Temperature Control


Features

153

０８／０６／０２　２０：０４：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５８　

▲

▼

To turn the system completely off,press the ON/OFF button.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the button to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’stemperature is independentlyregulated, based on the driver’s andpassenger’s side setting. The systemalso regulates each temperaturebased on the information of the sunlight sensor and the sun’s positionwhich is updated automatically bythe navigation’s global positioningsystem (GPS). For example, if thedriver’s side of the vehicle is gettingtoo much sun, the system will adjustto a lower temperature.

On models with navigation system To Turn Everything Off Semi-automatic Operation

Fan Control

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button


154

０８／０６／０２　２０：０４：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１５９　

CONTINUED

This button directs the main airflowto the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windshield byclosing the corner vents on thedashboard. To close the vents, rotatethe wheel under each corner vent.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

Use the mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the center,corner, and rear vents in thedashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard, rear andthe floor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents and thedefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent through the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.


Windshield Defroster ButtonMode ControlRecirculation ButtonF

eatures

155

０８／０６／０２　２０：０４：５６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６０　

You can adjust the direction of theair coming from the rear vents in theback of the center console bymoving the tab in the center of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

You can also adjust the amount ofairflow by turning the dial betweenthe vents.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

When the indicator in the button ison, the passenger’s side temperatureautomatically adjusts to the driver’sside temperature.



Rear VentilationAutomatic Heated Wiper Zone


156

DIAL

TABS

０８／０６／０２　２０：０５：０３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６１　

The temperatures of the driver’s sideand the front passenger’s side arecontrolled independently.

To adjust each temperature, turneither of the temperature controldials on the climate control panel.

When you set each temperature toits lower limit or its upper limit, it willbe displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.


Dual Temperature ControlF

eatures

157

Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side

０８／０６／０２　２０：０５：１０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６２　

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is under thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors


158

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

０８／０６／０２　２０：０５：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６３　

CONTINUED

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Features

159

AM/FMBUTTON

PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR SEEK/SKIP BAR


POWERBUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

VOLUME KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BAR PRESET BARS TUNE BAR

A.SEL(AUTOSELECT)BUTTON


POWERBUTTON

SOUNDBUTTON

RTS model

VOLUME KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

SCANBUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：０５：２２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６４　


160

SCANBUTTON

TUNE BARPRESET BARS

SEEK/SKIP BAR

RTL and Canadian EX-L models withoutnavigation system

RTL and Canadian EX-L models withnavigation system

POWERBUTTON

SOUNDBUTTON

VOLUME KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BARPRESET BARS


VOLUME KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

AM/FM BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

POWERBUTTON

SOUNDBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：０５：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６５　

－

－－

－－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbars, and auto select.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a station

with a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR button or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning thevolume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system (see page ).

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

Each side of the bars (16) can store one frequency on AMand two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar, then release it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

163


To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

SCAN

Preset

SEEK


Features

161

０８／０６／０２　２０：０５：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsas previously described.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset bars.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset bar if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset bar.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

Press the SOUND button repeatedlyto display the SUBWOOFER (ifequipped), BASS, TREBLE, FADER,and BALANCE settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOLUME knobto adjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the display.The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

165

To turn off auto select

If equipped

AUTO SELECT

SUBWOOFER

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Adjusting the Sound


162

０８／０６／０２　２０：０５：５１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６７　

－

－In addition to the knobs, buttons, andbars on the radio control panel, youcan operate some of the radiocontrols on the navigation systemscreen.

To adjust the sound, push theAUDIO button, then enter the soundgrid by touching the SOUND icon onthe display.

While you are listening to the radio,you can change to another band bypressing the AUDIO button next tothe navigation system screen, andthen touching the desired band icon(FM1, FM2, or AM).

AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUNDare adjustable from the navigationscreen. For an explanation of thesefunctions, see pages and .

Touch theA.SEL icon to activate the auto selectfunction. You will see A.SEL flashingon the display.

Touch the SCAN icon toactivate the scan function. You willsee SCAN on the display. Touch theicon again to deactivate it.

161 162

CONTINUED


Operating the Radio on theNavigation System Screen

AUTO SELECT

SCAN

Adjusting the Sound


Features

163

AUDIO BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：０６：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６８　

－

－

－

＋－

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/Rightbalance adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while Front/Rear faderadjusts the front-to-back strength.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjustthe front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’or ‘‘RR’’ icon. You can use the instrument panel

brightness control dial to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or on eachside of the treble or bass adjustmentbar. The adjustment bar shows youthe current setting.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker.

To see the audio display when youare finished adjusting the sound,wait 5 seconds.

98

On models with navigation systemLeft/Right Balance and Front/Rear Fader

Audio System Lighting

Voice Control System

Treble/Bass

SUBWOOFER


164

０８／０６／０２　２０：０６：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１６９　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Driving very near the transmitter of

a station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,atmospheric conditions, and evenitems stored on the roof rack.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

CONTINUED

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

165

０８／０６／０２　２０：０６：１８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７０　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

166

０８／０６／０２　２０：０６：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７１　

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Features

167

POWER BUTTON

TUNE BAR

VOLUMEKNOB

DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

POWER BUTTON

VOLUMEKNOB

CATEGORY BAR

DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON

PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

RTL and Canadian EX-L models withoutnavigation system

RTL and Canadian EX-L models withnavigation system

TUNE BAR

PRESET BARS

XM BUTTON

XM BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：０６：３１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７２　

－

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods whenXM Satellite Radio does not transmitthe artist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, and Canada, exceptHawaii and Alaska. XM is aregistered trademark of XM SatelliteRadio, Inc.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.The navigation system screen alsoshows all XM information when theAUDIO button is pressed.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. Push thePWR button to turn on the audiosystem, and press the XM button.

Adjust the volume by turning thevolume knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

You can also change to the XM radiowhile you are listening to an FMstation, AM station, CD, etc. bytouching the XM1 or XM2 icon onthe audio display (navigation systemscreen).

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:Channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

On RTL and Canadian EX-L models


Operating the XM Radio

MODE

168

On vehicles with navigation system

０８／０６／０２　２０：０６：４１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７３　

－

－

－

－Press the TUNE bar tochange channel selections. Press

for higher numbered channelsand for lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar ( or ) to select anothercategory.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the screen.The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button or touch the iconagain.

You can store up to 12preset channels using each side ofthe preset bar or preset icons on thescreen. Each side of the bar storesone channel from the XM1 band andone channel from the XM2 band.

Pick a preset number (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the bar (icon) until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper side of the presetbar (icon) to tune to it.

To store a channel:

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

TUNE

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

SCAN

Preset


Features

169

０８／０６／０２　２０：０６：５１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７４　

－

－

－

－

－

－

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, oris not part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.

XM Satellite Radio DisplayMessages

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


170

０８／０６／０２　２０：０６：５８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７５　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

CONTINUED


Features

171

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０８／０６／０２　２０：０７：０３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７６　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XMSatellite Radio reception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR button to turn on the audiosystem and press the XM button. Avariety of music types and styles willplay.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact

, or call1-877-438-9677. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number and

your credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press the TUNEbar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

After you’ve registered with XMSatellite Radio, keep your audiosystem in the satellite radio modewhile you wait for activation. Thisshould take about 30 minutes.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


172

０８／０６／０２　２０：０７：１４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７７　

CONTINUED

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio. Seepage for the CD player operationinformation.

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.

For models without navigationsystem, see pages through .

For models with navigation system,see pages through .

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay.

You can select up to 999 tracks/files.If the number of tracks/files is 1,000or more, the system can not accessthem.When there are more than 99 foldersin a disc, the display only shows twodigits.

You can select up to 400 tracks/filesin a disc.A disc can support a maximumnumber of 100 folders, and eachfolder can hold 255 playable files.

If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen by pressing andholding CD/AUX or CD button untilyou hear a beep.

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED(UNSUPPORT on models withnavigation system), and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVD discs do notwork in this unit.

175

181 188

189 197




On RT, Canadian DX, and VP models

Playing CDs

Features

173

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：０７：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７８　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:

Maximum layers(including ROOT):

8 layers

99 layers

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT):

8 layers

99 layers





Playing CDs

174

０８／０６／０２　２０：０７：３１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１７９　

To load or play a disc,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay.

CONTINUED

On RT, Canadian DX, and VP modelsTo Play a Disc

CD Player

Features

175

SEEK/SKIP BAR

RANDOMBUTTON

CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BARS TUNE/FOLDER BAR

REPEATBUTTON

DISPLAYBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON


CD BUTTON

PWR BUTTON

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０８／０６／０２　２０：０７：３９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８０　

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

When you press and release theDISP button while a disc without textdata is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 17characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown. You can see up to 31characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the DISPbutton again, the display shows thefirst 15 characters again.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track isshown in the display. When playing adisc in MP3 or WMA, the numbersof the current folder and file areshown. The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.198

To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function

CD Player

176

０８／０６／０２　２０：０７：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８１　

－

－You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips forward tothe beginning of the next track (filein MP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the side, to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP bar.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE/FOLDER bar.Press the side of the bar to skipto the next folder, and the sideof the bar to skip to the beginning ofthe previous folder.

In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SKIP

FOLDER SELECTION

CD Player

Features

177

０８／０６／０２　２０：０７：５６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８２　

－－－In MP3 or WMA mode

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT button twice.You will see ‘‘ RPT’’ in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current folder. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.Pressing the RDM button, orselecting a different folder with theTUNE/FOLDER bar also turns offthe repeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM button. In MP3 orWMA mode, press the RDM buttonrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press theRDM button for 2 seconds to returnto normal play.

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT) FOLDER-REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

CD Player

178

０８／０６／０２　２０：０８：０１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８３　

－－－

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the remainingfolders for 10 seconds each. Afterplaying the first file of the last folder,the system plays normally.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press and hold theSCAN button until you hear a beepto get out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles on the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press the RDM button. You will see‘‘ RDM’’ in the display. Thesystem will then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random by pressingand holding the RDM button again,or by selecting a different folder withthe FOLDER bar.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play to randomplay (within a disc random play),then to normal playing.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar also turns off the scanfeature.

This feature,when activated, samples the first fileof each folder on the disc. Toactivate folder scan, press the SCANbutton twice. You will see‘‘ SCAN’’ in the display.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, selecting a different folderwith the TUNE/FOLDER bar, orpressing the SCAN button, also turnsoff the folder scan.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal playing.

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)FOLDER-RANDOM FOLDER SCAN

CD Player

Features

179

０８／０６／０２　２０：０８：１０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８４　

－＋

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds. To beginplaying, press the CD button.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the PWRbutton or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the disc will begin playing where itleft off.

An optional six disc CD changer isavailable for your vehicle from yourdealer.

This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDplayer/changer and the radio.

Load the desired CDs into themagazine, and load the magazineinto the changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the CD changer, press theAUX button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 5(DISC ) side for a previous disc orthe preset 6 (DISC ) side to selectthe next disc in sequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available CD to load andplay.


.198

To Stop Playing a Disc

Operating the Optional CDChanger

Protecting Discs

CD Player

180

０８／０６／０２　２０：０８：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８５　

CONTINUED

CD Changer (Models without navigation system)

Features

181

AM/FMBUTTON

PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

RT model RTL and Canadian EX-L models withoutnavigation system

TUNE/FOLDER BAR

EJECT BUTTON

CD SLOT

CD BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR RANDOM BUTTON

DISPLAYBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

CD SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

PRESET BARS

TUNE/FOLDER BAR

RANDOM BUTTONSEEK/SKIP BAR

DISPLAYBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

LOAD BUTTON LOAD BUTTON

PWR BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PWR BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：０８：２８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８６　

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changerholds up to six discs.

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the disc changer withthe same controls used for the radio.To select the disc changer, press theCD or CD/AUX button. You will see‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc andtrack numbers, and the elapsed timeare shown in the display. You canalso select the displayed informationwith the DISP button (see page ).The system will continuously play adisc until you change modes.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again onthe display, insert the next CD intothe CD slot.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

Insert a CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

On the upper right side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinking,and the green CD load indicatorwill come on.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

183

On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EX-Lmodels without navigation system


Loading Discs

To Play a Disc

182

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０８／０６／０２　２０：０８：３９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８７　

CONTINUED

If the text data has more than 17characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown. You can see up to 31characters of the text data.


If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:



You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.


The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.


Text Data Display FunctionF

eatures

183

０８／０６／０２　２０：０８：４９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８８　

－ Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips forward tothe beginning of the next track (filein MP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the side, to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold either side ( or

) of the SEEK/SKIP bar.

Use the SEEK/SKIP bar while a discis playing to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3 or WMAmode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theTUNE/FOLDER bar to selectfolders in the disc and use eitherside of the SEEK/SKIP bar tochange files.

To select a different disc, use theappropriate preset buttons (1through 6). If you select an emptyposition, the system will go into theloading sequence (see page ).




When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the DISP button.

182


SKIPTo Change or Select Tracks/Files

184

０８／０６／０２　２０：０８：５６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１８９　

－

－

－－This feature

continuously replays the current disc.To activate disc repeat, press andrelease the RPT button repeatedlyuntil you see ‘‘ RPT’’ in thedisplay. Press and hold the RPTbutton again to turn it off.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, to discrepeat then to normal playing.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, press and release the RPTbutton repeatedly until you see‘‘ RPT’’ in the display. Thesystem continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press and hold theRPT button to turn it off. Pressingthe RDM button, or selecting adifferent folder with the TUNE/FOLDER bar also turns off therepeat feature.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE/FOLDER bar.Press the side of the bar to skipto the next folder, and the sideof the bar to skip to the beginning ofthe previous folder.

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED


DISC REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)FOLDER SELECTION

Features

185

０８／０６／０２　２０：０９：０４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９０　

－－－

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’in the display. You will get a 10second sampling of each track/file inthe disc/folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a current folder inrandom order, rather than in theorder they are compressed in MP3or WMA. To activate folder randomplay, press and release the RDMbutton repeatedly. You will see‘‘ RDM’’ in the display. Thesystem will then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent folder with the TUNE/FOLDER bar.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM button. In MP3 orWMA mode, press the RDM buttonrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press theRDM button for 2 seconds to returnto normal play.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play, to within adisc random play, then to normalplay.

In MP3 or WMA mode SCANFOLDER RANDOM



186

０８／０６／０２　２０：０９：０８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９１　

－－

When the first track in the last disc,or the first file in the last main folderin the last disc begins to play, thedisc scan mode will be canceled.Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE/FOLDER baralso turns off the scan feature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan, disc scan, then to normalplay.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, folder scan, disc scan,then to normal play.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first track ineach disc in order (the first file inthe main folder on each disc in MP3or WMA mode). To activate the discscan feature, press and release theSCAN button repeatedly until‘‘ SCAN’’ shows in the display.The system will then play the firsttrack/file in the first main folder inthe first disc for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the following first tracks/filesfor 10 seconds each. When it plays atrack/file that you want to continuelistening to, press and hold theSCAN button again.

This feature,when activated, samples the first filein each folder on the disc in theorder they are recorded. To activatethe folder scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘ SCAN’’ in thedisplay. The system will then playthe first file in the main folders forabout 10 seconds. If you do nothing,the system will then play thefollowing first files for 10 secondseach. When it plays a file that youwant to continue listening to, pressand hold the SCAN button.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, or selecting a differentdisc (using the preset buttons) orfolder (using the TUNE/FOLDERbar) turns off the SCAN or F-SCANfeature.

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode DISC SCANFOLDER SCAN


Features

187

０８／０６／０３　１４：４１：０５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９２　

To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject button ( ). Whena disc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 10 seconds, the disc willreload into the slot. Then the systemreturns to the previous mode [AM,FM, or XM (if equipped)].

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset bar. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds. To beginplaying, press the CD or CD/AUXbutton.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM or XM (ifequipped) button. Press the CD(CD/AUX on models with XMsatellite radio) button again to switchback to the CD changer.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the PWRbutton or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the disc will begin playing where itleft off.


.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is on or off:

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the LOADindicator begins to blink.

198

Removing Discs from the In-dashDisc Changer


Protecting Discs


188

０８／０６／０２　２０：０９：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９３　

Your audio system has an in-dashCD changer that holds up to six CDs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

CONTINUED

On RTL and Canadian EX-L models withnavigation system

CD Changer (Models with navigation system)

To Play a Disc

Features

189

SEEK/SKIP BAR

DISPLAY BUTTONAM/FM BUTTON

PRESET BARS RANDOM BUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR

CD SLOTLOAD BUTTON EJECT BUTTON

RTL and Canadian EX-L models with navigation system

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

０８／０６／０２　２０：０９：３２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９４　

The CD changer is behind thenavigation system screen. To use theCD changer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the CD changer appears.

Be careful not to injure your fingerswhen opening or closing thenavigation system screen.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonnext to the CD slot until the loadindicator above the slot turns fromamber to green.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the OPEN buttonagain. Do not use the folded screenas a tray. If you put a cup, forexample, on the screen, the liquidinside the cup may spill on thescreen when you go over a bump.

1.


Loading Discs

190

OPEN BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

CD SLOT

０８／０６／０２　２０：０９：３８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９５　

The indicators above the discbuttons of the empty positions willblink, and the green load indicatorabove the CD slot comes on.

If you press the LOAD button whilea CD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the first CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate disc button.Select an empty disc button (theindicator above the button is off),and press the button. The systemwill stop playing the current CD andstart the loading sequence. It willthen play the CD just loaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Insert a CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns amber and blinks as the CDis loaded.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again onthe display, insert the next CD intothe CD slot.


You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLD indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.


2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED


Text Data Display FunctionF

eatures

191

０８／０６／０２　２０：０９：４９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９６　

－＞

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:





When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the DISP button.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips forward tothe beginning of the next track (filein MP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the side, to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or SKIP bar.

The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

If the text data has more than 17characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown. You can see up to 31characters of the text data.


If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SKIP


192

０８／０６／０２　２０：０９：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９７　

－

－－

－

－

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, to discrepeat then to normal playing.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM button or touch theTRACK RANDOM icon on thescreen. In MP3 or WMA mode, pressthe RDM button repeatedly to selectRDM (within a disc random play).You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in the display.Press the RDM button or touch theTRACK RANDOM icon to return tonormal play.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, press and release the RPTbutton repeatedly until you see‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press and hold the RPTbutton to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button, or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff the repeat feature.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar. Press the

side to skip to the next folder,and press the side to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button ortouch the TRACK REPEAT icon onthe screen. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in thedisplay. Press and hold the RPTbutton, or touch the TRACKREPEAT icon again to turn it off. This feature

continuously replays the current disc.To active disc repeat, press andrelease the RPT button repeatedlyuntil you see ‘‘D-RPT’’ in the display,or touch the DISC REPEAT icon onthe screen. Press and hold the RPTbutton, or touch the DISC REPEATicon again to turn it off.

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED



FOLDER REPEATFOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

DISC REPEAT

Features

193

０８／０６／０２　２０：１０：０６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９８　

－－－

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder on the disc in the orderthey are recorded. To activate thefolder scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.The system will then play the firstfile in the main folders for about 10seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the followingfirst files for 10 seconds each. Whenit plays a file that you want tocontinue listening to, press and holdthe SCAN button.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, or selecting a differentdisc (using the preset buttons) orfolder (using the TUNE bar) turnsoff the SCAN or F-SCAN feature.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a current folder inrandom order, rather than in theorder they are compressed in MP3or WMA. To activate folder randomplay, press and release the RDMbutton repeatedly. You will see‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing and holding the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent folder with the TUNE bar.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play, to within adisc random play, then to normalplay.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button or touch the TRACKSCAN icon on the screen. You willsee ‘‘SCAN’’ in the display. You willget a 10 second sampling of eachtrack/file in the disc/folder. Pressand hold the SCAN button or touchthe TRACK SCAN icon again to getout of scan mode and play the lasttrack sampled.

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode


F-SCANFOLDER RANDOMSCAN

194

０８／０６／０２　２０：１０：１２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０１９９　

－

CONTINUED

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan, disc scan, then to normalplay.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, folder scan, disc scan,then to normal play.

When the first track in the last disc,or the first file in the last main folderin the last disc begins to play, thedisc scan mode will be canceled.Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP bar or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff the scan feature.

You can also select a track/filedirectly from a track list on the audiodisplay. Touch the TRACK LISTicon. The track list menu appears onthe audio display.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber and the location are alsodisplayed.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first track ineach disc in order (the first file inthe main folder on each disc in MP3or WMA mode). To activate the discscan feature, press and release theSCAN button repeatedly until‘‘D-SCAN’’ shows in the display, ortouch the DISC SCAN icon on thescreen. The system will then play thefirst track/file in the first mainfolder in the first disc for about 10seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the followingfirst track/file for 10 seconds each.When it plays a track/file that youwant to continue listening to, pressand hold the SCAN button or touchthe DISC SCAN icon again.

In MP3 or WMA mode


Using a Track ListD-SCANF

eatures

195

FOLDER ICON TRACK FILE ICON

RETURN ICONFOLDER NUMBER

０８／０６／０３　１４：４１：４３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２００　

▲ ▼

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notload another CD within 10 seconds,the system selects the previousmode (AM, FM1, FM2, or XMRadio).

To remove the disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe appropriate preset bar orcorresponding number on the screen.When that disc begins playing, pressthe eject button.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or XMbutton. Each time you press theAM/FM button, the system changesto the next mode (AM, FM1, or FM2). When you return to CD mode bypressing the CD/AUX button, playwill continue where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWRbutton or the ignition switch, playwill continue at the same point whenyou turn it back on.

If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number is shown.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side ofthe display. To go back to theprevious display, touch the Returnicon on the display.

Select the desired track/file bytouching the icon on the display. Theselected icon will be highlighted inblue. The system begins to play theselected track/file. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, touch the folder iconon the upper left of the screen tomove to the parent folder. Thecurrent folder is highlighted in blue.

Removing CDs from the In-dashCD Changer



196

０８／０６／０２　２０：１０：２８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０１　

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is on or off:

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the LOADindicator begins to blink.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .198


Protecting DiscsF

eatures

197

０８／０６／０２　２０：１０：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０２　

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the CD changer.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality CDs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

198

０８／０６／０２　２０：１０：４３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０３　

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information onRecommended Discs

Protecting Your CDs

Features

199

With Label/Sticker

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

Bubbled/Wrinkled

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Sealed With PlasticRing

０８／０６／０２　２０：１０：５４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０４　

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual-disc .

4. 5.

Protecting Your CDs

200

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

(Only on modelswith CD changer.)

０８／０６／０２　２０：１１：０６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０５　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

CauseError Message Solution

199

High Temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 199). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out the player.

Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 199).

On models without navigation systemOn models with navigation system

1 :2 :

CD Player/Changer Error Messages

Features

201

HEAT ERRORHOT

UNSUPPORTEDUNSUPPORT

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL

PUSH EJECTMECH ERROR

CHANGER ERRORCHK DISC LOAD

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL

CHECK DISCDISC ERROR

1

2

1

2

1

2

０８／０６／０２　２０：１１：１４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０６　

＋－

＋

－

＋－

▲ ▼

＋－

＋

－

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the upper display.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM1, XM2 (if equipped), CD (if adisc is loaded), or AUX-Audio.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

To search up and down from thecurrent frequency and find a stationwith a strong signal, press the top( ) or bottom ( ) of the button for1 second.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

To go to the next disc, press the top( ) of the button for 1 second.Press the bottom ( ) for 1 secondto go back to the previous disc.

When you play an MP3/WMA disc,press the top ( ) of the button for 1second to go to the next folder. Pressthe bottom ( ) for 1 second to goback to the previous folder.



Remote Audio Controls

202

MODE BUTTON

CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：１１：２２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０７　

＋

－

＋－

The auxiliary input jack is on the trayabove the glove box. The system willaccept auxiliary input from standardaudio accessories.

When the appropriate audio unit isconnected to the auxiliary input jack,press the CD/AUX or AUX button toselect the unit.

If you are listening to XM SatelliteRadio, use the CH button to changechannels. Each time you press thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset channel.Press the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous preset channel.To go to the next channel of thecategory you are listening to, pressthe top ( ) of the button for 1second. Press the bottom ( ) for 1second to go back to the previouschannel.

Except RT and Canadian DX models

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

Auxiliary Input JackF

eatures

203

AUXILIARYINPUT JACK

０８／０６／０２　２０：１１：２８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０８　

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific code with the presetbars. Because there are hundreds ofnumber combinations possible fromthe five digits, making the systemwork without knowing the exactcode is nearly impossible.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

You should have received a radiocode card that lists your audiosystem’s code and serial numbers. Itis best to store this card in a safeplace at home. In addition, youshould write the audio system’sserial number in this owner’s manual.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the preset bars to enterthe code. The code is located on theradio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have ten tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin ten attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

Radio Theft Protection

204

０８／０６／０２　２０：１１：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２０９　

Press and hold the H (Preset 1) sideof the bar until the hour advances tothe desired time. Press and hold theM (Preset 2) side of the bar until theminutes advance to the desired time.

To set the time, press the CLOCKbutton until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theclock set button until you hear abeep, then pressing the R (Preset 3)side of the bar sets the clock back tothe previous hour.If the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

Press the clock set button again toenter the set time.

For example:

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00



Setting the Clock

Features

205

PRESET BARS PRESET BARS

CLOCK BUTTON CLOCK BUTTON

RT, Canadian DX, and VP models RTS, RTL, and Canadian EX-L models withoutnavigation system

Model without XM satelliteradio model is shown.

０８／０６／０２　２１：３５：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１０　

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the In-Bed Trunk, will causeit to alarm. It also alarms if the radioand navigation components areremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, In-Bed Trunk, or any dooris not fully closed. If the system willnot set, check the door and tailgateopen monitor and In-Bed Trunk openindicator on the instrument panel(see pages and ) to see if thedoors and In-Bed Trunk are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Use the remote transmitterto quickly check that the hood,In-Bed Trunk, and all doors areclosed. Push the lock button twicewithin 5 seconds. There should be anaudible confirmation beep.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, licenseplate lights, and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset anactivated system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the In-Bed Trunk.For the system to activate, you mustlock the doors from the outside withthe key, driver’s lock tab, door lockswitch, or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

11 75

If equipped

Security System

206

NOTE:SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０８／０６／０２　２０：１１：５２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１１　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

The cruise control system can beleft on, even when it is not in use.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

207

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０８／０６／０２　２０：１２：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１２　

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

208

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１２：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１３　

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap the brake pedal, the systemremembers the previously set speed.To return to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle accelerates tothe same speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

209

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：１２：１８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１４　

The direction and center positionicons come on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. The system then begins tocheck the vehicle direction andilluminates the appropriate icon(s).

The compass can be affected bydriving near power lines or stations,across bridges, through tunnels,over railroad crossings, past largevehicles, or driving near largeobjects that cause magneticinterference. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

Your vehicle has a compass in therear view mirror. The compassindicates the vehicle direction withilluminated letters: N (north), S(south), W (west), and E (east). Thecenter blue icon in the compass isalways on. It serves as a referencepoint.

To turn the compass on or off, pressthe compass button on the back ofthe rear view mirror.

The compass mirror has a lightsensor behind the right side of therear view mirror. Make sure theextended sun visor or an accessory isnot covering the sensor.

If equippedCompass Function

Compass

210

COMPASSBUTTON

CENTER ICON

REAR VIEW MIRROR

０８／０６／０２　２０：１２：２５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１５　

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to continually showthe wrong direction, do this.

Drive the vehicle slowly in circlesat less than 5 mph (8 km/h) untilthe center icon turns blue. Thisicon also turns blue by continuingto drive the vehicle under normaldriving conditions. When you seean actual heading on the compass,calibration is completed.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Find the zone for your area on thezone map (see page ). Eachzone number (1 through 15)corresponds to a compass zone onthe table (see page ).

Press and hold the compassbutton for about 3 seconds. Whenall of the direction icons begin toblink, release the button.

The blue direction icon(s) blinkand show the current zone.

If the zone is incorrect, press andrelease the compass buttonrepeatedly to get to the correctnumber.

The compass will return to thenormal display about 4 secondsafter you stop adjusting a zonenumber.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

With the blue center icondisplayed, press and hold thecompass button for about 6seconds. When the center iconturns red, release the button.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

5.

212

212

CONTINUED

Compass Calibration

Compass Zone Selection

Compass

Features

211

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１２：３６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１６　

Compass

212

Zone Map Compass Display for Each Zone

０８／０６／０２　２０：１２：３９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１７　

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

Before programming yourHomeLink to operate a garage dooropener, confirm that the opener hasan external entrapment protectionsystem, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’or other safety and reverse stopfeatures.

If your garage door wasmanufactured before April 1, 1982,you may not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. These unitsdo not have safety features thatcause the motor to stop and reverseit if an obstacle is detected duringclosing, increasing the risk of injury.

Do not use HomeLink with anygarage door opener that lacks safetystop and reverse features.

If equipped

CONTINUED

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

General InformationF

eatures

213

０８／０６／０２　２０：１２：４５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１８　

×

－Units manufactured between April 1,1982 and January 1, 1993 may beequipped with safety stop andreverse features. If your unit doesnot have an external entrapmentprotection system, an easy test toconfirm the function andperformance of the safety stop andreverse feature is to lay a 2 4under the closing door. The doorshould stop and reverse uponcontacting the piece of wood.As an additional safety feature,garage door openers manufacturedafter January 1, 1993 are required tohave external entrapment protectionsystems, such as an electronic eye,which detect an object obstructingthe door.

Refer to the safety information thatcame with your garage door openerto test that the safety features arefunctioning properly. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.Before programming HomeLink to agarage door or gate opener, makesure that people and objects are outof the way of the device to preventpotential injury or damage.When programming a garage dooropener, park just outside the garage.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.


Important Safety Precautions Training HomeLinkBefore you begin

214

０８／０６／０２　２０：１２：５２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２１９　

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

CONTINUED


Features

215

０８／０６／０３　１７：５０：１０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２０　




HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.


216

０８／０６／０２　２０：１３：１１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２１　

To use the HFL, your phone musthave approved Bluetooth capabilityalong with the Hands Free Profile.This type of phone is availablethrough many phone makers andcellular carriers. You can also find anapproved phone by visiting

, or by calling

the Hands Free Link consumersupport at (888) 528-7876. In Canada,visit , or call (888) 9-HONDA-9.

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters).

The Bluetooth word mark andlogos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. andany use of such marks by HondaMotor Co., Ltd. is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

Your vehicle is equipped with theBluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).HFL uses Bluetooth technology tolink your cell phone to your vehicle.With HFL, you can place and receivecalls through your vehicle’s audiosystem, without the distraction ofhandling your cell phone. To use thisfeature, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone with theHands Free Profile. For moreinformation, and a list of compatiblecell phones, visit

, or call (888) 528-7876. InCanada, visit , or call(888) 9-HONDA-9.

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

The HFL is available in both Englishand French (Canadian models only).To change the language, see page

.

221

243

221handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca


Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Voice Control

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Features

217

０８／０６／０２　２０：１３：１９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２２　

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the front map lightsand the HomeLink buttons. Onmodels with navigation system, themicrophone is shared with thenavigation system.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while operatingeither of the HFL buttons or makinga call, the HFL over-rides the audiosystem. To change the volume level,use the audio system volume knob,or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

Your vehicle’s HFL system has thecellular phonebook import function.This allows you to import yourcellular phonebook to the HFL.Using the navigation system, you canmake a call directly and store adesired number in the HFL from thelist shown on the navigation display.For more information on how toimport the phonebook or to make acall, see page .

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

You can also store the desirednumber to the HFL directly fromyour cell phone using the receivecontact function in the HFL.

228

HFL ButtonsMicrophone

Audio System

Phonebook


218

HFL BACK BUTTON

HFL TALKBUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：１３：２８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２３　

When you are operating the HFL,dialing or receiving calls with theaudio system in use, you will see theabove screen on the navigationdisplay.

The HFL buttons are used asfollows:

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.Press and release the button, thenwait for a beep before giving acommand.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

You will also see ‘‘HANDS FREELINK’’ on the audio display.

‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed onthe audio display if your Bluetooth -compatible phone is linked to theHandsFreeLink .

Information Display


Features

219

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

０８／０６／０２　２０：１３：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２４　

＊

＊

＊－

－

－

－

－

＊

When you are operating the HFL, orwhen you manually select HFL onthe multi-information display, youwill see this information on thescreen:

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone. Five bars equalsfull strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicatesthe power currently remaining inyour phone’s battery. Five barsequals full battery strength.

HFL Mode Indicates when youare dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send thisinformation to the HFL.

:



220

SIGNALSTRENGTH

BATTERYLEVEL STATUS

HFLMODE

ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING

０８／０６／０２　２０：１３：４５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２５　

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide instructions for allbasic features of the HFL.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

To enter a command, press andrelease the Talk button. Then,after the beep, say your commandin a clear, natural tone.

Close the windows and themoonroof.

Give a voice command in a clearnatural speaking voice withoutpausing between words ornumbers. If the system cannotrecognize your command becauseof the background noise, speaklouder.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

If the microphone picks up voicesother than yours, the system maynot interpret your voicecommands correctly.

Lower the A/C fan speed duringvoice recognition operation.

Adjust the airflow from both thedashboard and side vents so theydo not blow against themicrophone on the ceiling.

CONTINUED

How to Use the HFL

All phones may notoperate identically, and somemay cause inconsistent operationof the HFL.

Using Voice Control


Features

221

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１３：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２６　

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press and release theTalk button, wait for the beep, andsay, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins from its main menu.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, and 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree help.’’


222

０８／０６／０２　２０：１４：０１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２７　

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likethe notification to be a ring tone orprompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after thebeep, the HFL returns to its mainmenu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in noring tone or prompt playbackduring an incoming call. The audiosystem will still mute, and amessage will be displayed.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Aring tone will be used’’ or ‘‘Anincoming call prompt will be used.’’If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you willhear a ring tone through the audiospeakers to announce an incomingcall. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ youwill hear this message toannounce an incoming call: ‘‘Youhave an incoming call.’’

The HFL response continues ‘‘Asecurity option is available to lockthe HFL system. Each time thevehicle is turned on, a passcodewould be required to use thissystem. Would you like thissecurity option turned on?’’ If yousay ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set yourpasscode. Refer to the settingprocedure in the next column.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

To set up the system, do this:

Setting Up the System


Features

223

０８／０６／０２　２０：１４：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２８　

The HFL will accept a numeric, four-digit passcode that you can use forsecurity purposes.

Follow the system setupprocedure as described previously.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘What is thefour-digit number you would liketo set as your passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpasscode you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is thiscorrect?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Security is on.Each time the vehicle is turned on,the passcode will be required touse the system. The system setupis complete. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘Security will notbe used. The system setup iscomplete.’’

Once a passcode is set, you can lockthe HFL so it only operates after thepasscode is entered.

The HFL will prompt you for yourpasscode each time the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON (II)position and you press the Talkbutton. You will only be asked forthe passcode once per ignition

cycle. If the passcode is set, itsresponse is ‘‘The system is locked.What is the four-digit passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpasscode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,4.’’

If the passcode is correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If thepasscode is not correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4 is incorrect.Please try again.’’ Go back to thestep 2.

If you forget your passcode and youcannot activate the HFL, consultyour dealer to cancel the passcode.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

To set your passcode, do this:

To enter your passcode, do this;

Setting Your Passcode


224

０８／０６／０２　２０：１４：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２２９　

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith Hands Free Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free calls.To confirm that your phone isBluetooth compatible, visit

, or call (888)528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-HONDA-9. Your phone retailershould also be able to confirm thatyour phone is Bluetooth compatible.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, visit

, call theHands Free Link consumersupport at (888) 528-7876, or callyour phone retailer. In Canada,call (888) 9-HONDA-9.During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note this

code. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘HFL is nowsearching for a Bluetooth phone.Make sure the phone you aretrying to pair is in discovery mode.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

1.

2.

3.

4.



CONTINUED

Pairing Your Phone

NOTE:


Features

225

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１４：３１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３０　

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Discovery mode.The phone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

6.

1.

2.

3.

7.

8.

5. To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:


226

０８／０６／０２　２０：１４：４１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３１　

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When all

phones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If no other phones arefound, the first phone remainslinked.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone. Say OK tocontinue, otherwise, say Go back,or Cancel.’’

1.

2.

1.

4.

5.

1.

2.

To list all paired phones, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:

To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:


Features

227

０８／０６／０２　２０：１４：５０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３２　

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch. Continuinga call without running the enginemay discharge and weaken thevehicle’s battery.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob, or thesteering wheel volume controls.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

You can also make a call directlyfrom the list shown on thenavigation display.

For more information on how tomake a call, see page .

2.

4.

1.

3.

231To make a call using a phone number,do this:

Making a Call


228

０８／０６／０２　２０：１４：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３３　

＃

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

To send a number during a call, do this:

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

The HFL allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFL phonebook for easy retrievalduring menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob, or the steeringwheel volume controls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob, or thesteering wheel volume controls.

To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

1.

1.2.

3.

4.

2.

CONTINUED

Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call


Features

229

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１５：０８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３４　

To send a name during a call, do this: To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from the HFL to thephone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from your phone tothe HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dialtones will be sent, and the call willcontinue.

2.

1.

3.

3.

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call


230

０８／０６／０２　２０：１５：１９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３５　

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscanceled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store up to50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any types ofnumbers. For example, you can storea phone number and use it to make acall, or you can store an accountnumber and use it during a call to amenu-driven phone system.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list.’’ Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891. Say enter, or continue to addnumbers.’’

1.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.

2.

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:

CONTINUED

Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook


Features

231

０８／０６／０２　２０：１５：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３６　

To edit the number of a name, do this:

To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ Say ‘‘Enter.’’ orcontinue to add numbers.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook in theorder which they were stored.When the end of the list isreached, the HFL response is,‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’


2.

1.

3.

3.2.

1.

4.

5. 4.

1.

2.


232

０８／０６／０２　２０：１５：４１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３７　

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:


To store a phone number from yourphone:


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob, or the steering

wheel volume controls.

You can store the desired number tothe HFL phonebook directly fromyour cell phone.

Your phone may not havethis capability. Visit

, or call the Hands FreeLink consumer support at (888)528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-HONDA-9. You can see your phone’sowner’s manual for information.

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘Phonebook options are store,edit, delete, receive contact and

list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Receivecontact.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘The receive process requiresoperation of your mobile phone.For safety, only perform thisfunction while the vehicle isstopped. HFL is now waiting toreceive a contact from a Bluetoothdevice.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFL response is‘‘One phone number has beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number? To discardthis number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Storing a Phone Number Directlyfrom Your Phone


Features

233

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１５：５０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３８　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Neil at work will bestored. Is this correct?’’

If you want to continue to storeany other numbers, press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘HFL is now waitingto receive a contact from aBluetooth device.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Susan at work will bestored. Is this correct?’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFL response is‘‘One phone number has beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number? To discardthis number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

If you do not want to continue tostore any other numbers, pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘No.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Neilat work has been stored. If morethan one number was received forthe contact entry, the HFL asksfor the name of the next number.If only one number is received, orall numbers have been stored, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likeHFL to receive another contact?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susanat work has been stored. Wouldyou like HFL to receive anothercontact?’’

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.


234

０８／０６／０２　２０：１５：５７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２３９　

To use the cellular phonebook withthe HFL, say or select ‘‘CellularPhonebook’’ from the Informationscreen. The navigation display willchange as shown above.

PIN Number: This option allows youto add, change, or remove a PINnumber for any phonebook that hasbeen imported.

Import Cellular Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to store thephonebook of your cellular phone inthe HFL. When you link your phoneto the HFL and select this option, thesystem will start importing andloading the phonebook.

If any phonebook is not stored andyour phone is not linked to the HFL,Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.

The cellular phonebook optionallows you to store up to 1,000 namesand 10,000 phone numbers in thephonebook of BluetoothHandsFreeLink from your cellularphonebook. The maximum namesand numbers to be stored varies onthe data size. With the HFL, you canthen automatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Your phone may not havethis capability. Visit

, or call the Hands FreeLink consumer support at (888)528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-HONDA-9. You can see your phone’sowner’s manual for information.


CONTINUED

Cellular Phonebook Options


Features

235

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１６：０５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４０　

Search Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to search thephone numbers stored in the HFL.When you enter a keyword for aperson’s name, such as the firstname or last name, the system willfind the number you want and letyou make calls.

Delete Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to delete the storedphonebook from the HFL. When youlink your phone to the HFL andselect this option, the system willautomatically delete the phonebookof the linked phone from the HFL(see page ).

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.

For information on linking to theHFL, see page .

You can import the phonebook ofyour cellular phone into the HFL.Link your phone to the HFL, andselect ‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.When the message ‘‘The import wassuccessful.’’ is displayed, touch thescreen to select ‘‘OK.’’ 225

239

To import the cellular phonebook NOTE:


236

Example

０８／０６／０２　２０：１６：１２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４１　

To search the imported phonebook Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe 4-digit PIN number to access thephonebook. The following screenwill appear.

The system will display a list ofperson’s names, with the closestmatch to the name you entered atthe top of the list.

You can search the stored numberby entering keywords.

Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.The display will change as shownabove.

Enter the PIN number. You cannotaccess a PIN protected phonebook ifyou do not use the correct PINnumber.

Enter the keyword for a person’sname, such as the first name or lastname, using the joystick. If thesystem does not find an exact match,say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finishentering the keyword.

CONTINUED


Features

237

０８／０６／０２　２０：１６：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４２　

－Select the number (1 6) of thedesired person from the list.

Up to three category icons aredisplayed in the right side of the list.These category icons indicate howmany numbers are stored for theperson. If a name has more thanthree category icons, ‘‘ ’’ isdisplayed.

The following category icons willappear:

After selecting a person, the systemwill display a list of the person’sphone numbers.

Select the desired number from thelist to make a call.

…


238

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

Preference

０８／０６／０２　２０：１６：３２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４３　

To store a number in the BluetoothHandsFreeLink

To delete the imported phonebook

You can delete the storedphonebook from the HFL.Link your phone to the HFL andselect ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.The display will change as shownabove.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe 4-digit PIN number to access thephonebook. The following screenwill appear.

Enter the PIN number to access thephonebook. You cannot access a PINprotected phonebook if you do notuse the correct PIN number.

Select the desired number from thelist to store it in the HFL.

Say or select ‘‘STORE INHandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select anumber to call’’ screen. The screenshown above will appear.

CONTINUED


Features

239

０８／０６／０２　２０：１６：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４４　

After you enter the correct PINnumber, or if the phonebook youselect is not PIN protected, thefollowing screen appears.

Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message‘‘The imported phonebook has beendeleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocomplete the deletion.

You can add, change or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Select the phonebook you wish toadd the PIN number to. Thephonebook you select cannotalready have a PIN icon. Thedisplay will change as shownabove.

1.

To add, change, or remove a PINnumber from any phonebook

To add a PIN number


240

０８／０６／０２　２０：１６：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４５　

Enter the 4-digit PIN number. Youwill be asked to re-enter the PIN toverify.

Select the phonebook that youwish to change the PIN numberfor. The display will change asshown above.

Enter your current PIN number.2. 2.1.

To change a PIN number

CONTINUED


Features

241

０８／０６／０２　２０：１６：５４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４６　

Enter your new 4-digit PINnumber. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN to verify.

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,all names in the HFL phonebook,and all imported phonebooks.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, andclear the passcode. Is this whatyou would like to do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, and thepasscode. This may take up to 2minutes to complete.’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

3.

1.

2.

3.

To clear the system, do this:

Clearing the System


242

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：０１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４７　

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout French name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Venillezattendre que le systeme change delangue. Please wait while thelanguage is changed.’’ ‘‘La languea ete changee. Retour au menuprincipal.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFL response is‘‘English or French?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Vous avezselectionne Français. Les nomsenregistres en mode Anglais neseront pas accessible en modeFrançais. Voulez-vous continuer?You have selected French. Nametags that were stored while inEnglish mode will not beaccessible in French mode. Wouldyou like to continue? ’’

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Pour que le systèmeidentifie les téléphones qui ont étéjumelés dans une autre langue, lesnoms des téléphones doivent êtreré-enregistrés.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

1.

2.

3.4.Canadian models onlyTo change from English to French, dothis:


Changing LanguageF

eatures

243

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４８　

＜＞

＜＞

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout English name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Please waitwhile the language is changed.Venillez attendre que le systemechange de langue.’’ ‘‘The languagehas been changed. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. For the system toidentify phones that were pairedwhile in another language, thephone names need to be re-recorded.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘ChangerLangue.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’

The HFL response is, for example,‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour

Paul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est lenom Français pour Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone dePat.’’ After all paired phonesmissing a French name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will prompt,‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘You haveselected English. Name tags thatwere stored while in French modewill not be accessible in Englishmode. Would you like tocontinue?’’, then the systemrepeats the response in English.

4.

1.

2.

3.To change from French to English, dothis:


244

NOTE:

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：１６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２４９　

＜＞

＜＞




The HFL says, for example, ‘‘Whatis the English name for

Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Téléphone dePat ?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’sphone.’’ After all paired phonesmissing an English name tag arere-recorded, the HFL will say‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

4.


Features

245

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５０　

For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you clean it,use a moist, soft cloth.

Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rearview is shownon the navigation system screen.


Rearview Camera and Monitor

246

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：２５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５１　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 248.................Fuel Recommendation . 248

.........Service Station Procedures . 249....................................Refueling . 249

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 252

...................................Oil Check . 253.............Engine Coolant Check . 253

...............................Fuel Economy . 254...Accessories and Modifications . 257

.............................Carrying Cargo . 259

Before Driving

Before

Driving

247

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５２　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

We recommended using a qualitygasoline containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contact

your authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Premium fuel is recommended whentowing in certain conditions (seepage ).

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

303

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

248

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：４２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５３　

CONTINUED

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Insert theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Refueling

Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

249

Pull

FUEL FILL CAPATTACHMENT

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：５１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５４　

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once.

If you do not properly tighten thecap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay (see page ).

If the system still detects a leak inthe vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay. Turn the engine off, andconfirm the fuel fill cap is installed. Ifit is, loosen it, then retighten it untilit clicks at least once. The messageshould go off after several days of

normal driving once you tighten orreplace the fuel fill cap. To scroll toanother message, press the INFObutton. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

If you do not properly tighten thecap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTENFUEL CAP’’ message on the multi-information display.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

5.

6.

81

375



On models with navigation systemTighten Fuel Cap Message


250

０８／０６／０２　２０：１７：５８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５５　

Whenever filling a fuel container,use an approved fuel container, andplace it on the ground. Do not fill thefuel container in the vehicle,including the pickup bed and theIn-Bed Trunk. Make sure to put thefuel pump nozzle in the fuel filler ofthe container securely and to handleit properly.

Gasoline or fuel vapors areextremely flammable and explosive.Improperly handling fuel can causean explosion in which you can beseriously injured.

Before placing the fuel container inthe vehicle, wipe up any spillcompletely.

Your vehicle has a warning label forfilling a portable fuel container onthe left rear side of the pickup bed.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container


Before

Driving

251

Do not fill a portable fuelcontainer in the pickup bed.

Static electricity can ignite gasvapors and you can be burned.

０８／０６／０２　２０：１８：０４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５６　

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood. The hood latchhandle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pullthis handle until it releases thehood, then lift the hood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard. Thehood will pop up slightly.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood marked by an arrow.

1. 2. 3.

Opening and Closing the Hood


252

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

SUPPORT ROD

GRIP

０８／０６／０２　２０：１８：１３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５７　

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

326

329

323

Adding Engine Oil

Engine Coolant CheckOil Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


Before

Driving

253

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MAX

MIN

RESERVE TANKDIPSTICK

０８／０６／０２　２０：１８：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５８　

－

－

－

－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPG

Highway MPG

Combined Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy

254

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

０８／０６／０２　２０：１８：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２５９　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

323CONTINUED

Fuel Economy Factors

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Drive moderately

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Observe the speed limit

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

326

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

255

０８／０６／０２　２０：１８：４８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６０　

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

1.2.3.4.

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Fuel Economy

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

256

Miles drivenGallons of

fuelMiles per

Gallon

100 Kilometers L per 100 kmLiter

０８／０６／０２　２０：１８：５７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６１　

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

If you install a truck cap, be sure it isproperly installed and does notexceed your vehicle’s load limits (seepage ).

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Before installing any accessory:

260

378

CONTINUED

Accessories

Your vehicle should not be used tocarry a slide-in camper.

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

257

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０８／０６／０２　２０：１９：０６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６２　

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety systems could make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

258

０８／０６／０２　２０：１９：１４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６３　

The pickup bed on your vehicleallows you to carry heavy and largecargo. You can also store items inthe In-Bed Trunk and on a roof-rack(if equipped).

Your vehicle also has theseconvenient storage areas inside:

Glove boxFront door and seat-back pocketsFold-up rear seat with under-seatstorageConsole compartmentPockets on the dashboard

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

259

GLOVE BOX

DASHBOARDPOCKETS

PICKUP BED

CONSOLECOMPARTMENTS

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

IN-BED TRUNK

FOLD-UP REAR SEAT WITH UNDER-SEAT STORAGE

DOOR POCKET

０８／０６／０２　２０：１９：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６４　

The maximum load for your vehicleis:

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit:

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

These figures include the totalweight of all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

Label Example

1.

2.

3.

On vehicles without moonroof

On vehicles with moonroof

Load Limits (Payload)

Carrying Cargo

260

1,530 lbs (690 kg)

1,480 lbs (670 kg)Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０８／０６／０２　２０：１９：３２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６５　

－ ×

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue loadmust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). Both are on a label onthe driver’s doorjamb.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

5.

6.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

4.

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

261

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



Max Load (1,530 lbs)



Cargo Weight(1,230 lbs)

Cargo Weight(930 lbs)

Cargo Weight(780 lbs)

０８／０６／０２　２０：１９：４６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６６　

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor in the In-Bed Trunk, placingthe heaviest items on the bottomand as far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownduring a crash or sudden stop.

Make sure the In-Bed Trunk lid isclosed securely before driving.

Be sure the total weight of theitems in the In-Bed Trunk does notexceed 300 lbs (136 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

If you fold the rear seats up, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop. Also, keep all cargobelow the bottom of the windows.If it is higher, it could interferewith the proper operation of theside curtain airbags.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area with therear seats folded up, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop. If you carry any items on a roof

rack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 110 lbs (50 kg).

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the In-BedTrunk or on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

262

０８／０６／０２　２０：１９：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６７　

Your vehicle can carry a largeamount of cargo in the pickup bed.

However, the pickup bed is notintended for carrying passengers.People who ride in the pickup bedcan be very seriously injured orkilled in a crash (see page ).

Make sure your cargo is properlyloaded and all items are secured sothey will not shift or fall out whiledriving.

When loading and unloading cargo,make sure all passengers or anyobjects are clear of the tailgatebefore opening or closing it. Thetailgate should be closed securelybefore driving when it is not usedas the extended pickup bed.

The maximum allowable loadingweight on the pickup bed is 1,100lbs (500 kg). Do not exceed theload limit (see page ).

Distribute cargo evenly on thepickup bed. Place the heaviestitems on the bottom and as farforward as possible of the rearaxle. Tie down and secure allitems that could be thrown out ofthe vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you stack items higher than thebed sides, tailgate, or back window,secure them with a net or cover.This will reduce the risk of itemsbeing thrown out of the pickupbed during a crash or sudden stop.

When the tailgate is dropped open,it can be used as an extendedpickup bed. The maximumallowable weight on the tailgatewhile driving is 300 lbs (136 kg).Exceeding this limit could damagethe tailgate.

Carrying heavy cargo in thepickup bed will raise your vehicle’scenter of gravity. This can affecthandling and performance. Drivemore slowly and cautiously, andallow extra time and distance forbraking.

8

260

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo in the Pickup Bed

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

263

Allowing passengers to ride inthe pickup bed or on the tailgatecan result in death or seriousinjury in a crash.

Make sure all passengers ridein a seat and wear a seat beltproperly.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２０：０５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６８　

You can also support motorcycles onthe pickup bed floor with the cleats.The floor panel of the pickup bed isdesigned to hold motorcycle tires. Besure to tighten motorcycles securely,with an approved tie-down ormotorcycle strap, according to themotorcycle maker’s instructions.

They are used to secure cargo on thepickup bed and to install a cargo netfor securing items. Do not use anyother parts of the pickup bed tosecure cargo or nets.

When carrying motorcycles or anyother cargo, do not spill any oil orfluid on the pickup bed. A spilledliquid may damage the pickup bed.

Your vehicle has eight tie downcleats on the pickup bed.

Tie Down Cleats

Carrying Cargo

264

TIE DOWN CLEATNever let passengers ride onthe pickup bed or in the In-BedTrunk space. This could causevery serious injuries or death ina collision. No one should ridein any position on your vehiclethat is not equipped with seatsand seat belts.

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading cargo on thevehicle can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Load the cargo carefully beforestarting to drive.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２０：１２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２６９　

The cargo net can be used to holdlightweight items in the pickup bed.Secure all items properly. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown outward in a crash or asudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used tocover the cargo area on the pickupbed.

Your vehicle’s pickup bed has a rustresistant surface. To repair smallchips and scratches in the bed, arepair kit is available from yourdealer. More extensive damageshould be repaired by your dealer.

To avoid problems with the bedsurface and the In-Bed Trunk lid, donot use spray-in bed liner products.

Optional Cargo Net Optional Cargo Cover

Pickup Bed Repair

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

265

０８／０６／０２　２０：２０：１８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７０　

266

０８／０６／０２　２０：２０：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７１　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 system, thevehicle stability assist (VSA )system, the tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS), and facts you needif you are planning to tow a trailer ordrive off-highway.

........................Driving Guidelines . 268

........................Preparing to Drive . 269.......................Starting the Engine . 270

..............Automatic Transmission . 271Variable Torque Management

.............4WD (VTM-4) System . 276Tire Pressure Monitoring System

......................................(TPMS) . 278...........................................Parking . 286

.............................Braking System . 288...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 289

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )........................................System . 291

.................Towing Weight Limits . 293..........Towing Weight Guidelines . 295

...........................Towing a Trailer . 296Off-Highway Driving

..................................Guidelines . 306

Driving

Driving

267

０８／０６／０２　２０：２０：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７２　

Your vehicle has higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,your vehicle has a higher center ofgravity. Drive slowly and cautiously,and allow more time and distance forbraking. Loading heavy cargo couldaffect your vehicle’s handling andperformance.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Make sure the cargo is properlyloaded and all items are secured sothey will not shift while driving.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Your vehicle allows you to carrymore cargo than a typical passengervehicle.

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

See page for off-highway drivingguidelines.

306

Driving Guidelines

268

０８／０６／０２　２０：２０：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７３　

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the tailgate is fullyclosed when it is not used as anextended pickup bed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and In-BedTrunk are securely closed andlocked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepages and ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the informationdisplay or multi-informationdisplay (depending on models)(see pages , , , and

).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

8.

7.

9.

10.

11.

121

133

99

16

61 76 7790

119

Preparing to Drive

Driving

269

０８／０６／０２　２０：２０：４５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７４　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine

270

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

101

０８／０６／０２　２０：２０：５３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７５　

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal, andpull the shift lever toward you. Youcannot shift out of Park when theignition switch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).91

CONTINUED


Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving

271

SHIFT LEVER

０８／０６／０２　２０：２１：０２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７６　

－－This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Pull the shift levertowards you, then move it out ofPark.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also pull the shift levertowards you to shift into Park. Toavoid transmission damage, come toa complete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkfor you to remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and pull the shift lever towardsyou to shift from Park to reverse. Toshift from reverse to neutral, cometo a complete stop, and then shift.Pull the shift lever towards youbefore shifting into reverse fromneutral.

275To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 22 to DD to NN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpull the shift lever towardsyou.

Pull the shift lever towardsyou.

Move the shift lever.


Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

272

０８／０６／０２　２０：２１：０８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７７　

－－

CONTINUED

Press the D3 switch on the end ofthe shift lever to turn this mode onor off; the D3 indicator comes onwhenever D3 is selected.

The D3 switch can be operated onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON(II) position and the shift lever is inthe D position.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

After you stop in D, 2, 1, N, or Rposition with the ignition switch inthe ACCESSORY (I) position for anextended period, you may not beable to move the shift lever fromneutral to reverse or Park. In thiscase, press the brake pedal, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, then shift out of neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.


D3Drive (D)Neutral (N)D

riving

273

D3 SWITCH

０８／０６／０２　２０：２１：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７８　

－ To shift to second,pull the shift lever towards you, thenshift to the lower gear. This positionlocks the transmission in secondgear. It does not downshift to firstgear when you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

This will increase theautomatic transmission fluidtemperature and may causeoverheating.

Shifting out of the D position willcancel D3, and cause the D3indicator to go out. Selecting the Dposition again will resume D3, andthe indicator will come on.

Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position turns D3 off. Touse D3 when you restart the engine,select the D position, and press theD3 switch again.

The D3 indicator also comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

When D3 is on, the transmissionselects only the first three gears.Use D3 for engine braking whengoing down a steep hill.


Second (2)When towing a trailer on level roadsunder normal driving conditions, donot use D3.

274

D3 INDICATOR

０８／０６／０２　２０：２１：２６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２７９　

－ To shift from second tofirst, pull the shift lever towards you,then shift to the lower gear. Thisposition locks the transmission infirst gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, and D,you can operate the transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

If you shift into first position whenthe vehicle speed is above 28 mph(45 km/h), the transmission shiftsinto second gear first to avoidsudden engine braking.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pulling the shift lever doesnot work.

Set the parking brake.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

First (1) Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release


Driving

275

０８／０６／０２　２０：２１：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８０　

Insert the built-in key into the shiftlock release slot.

Push down on the key while youpull the shift lever towards you,and move it out of Park to neutral.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the instrument panelside. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with avariable torque management4-wheel-drive system (VTM-4) thatdistributes engine torque to theappropriate drive axle depending onthe available traction conditions. Thesystem is completely automatic,always active, and does not requireany driver interaction.

6.4.

5.

Automatic Transmission, VTM-4 System

VTM-4 System

276

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

COVER

VTM-4 LOCK BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：２１：４１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８１　

Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.The indicator in the button comeson.

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to move the vehicle,stop and reverse direction.

If you become stuck, you canactivate the VTM-4 by pressing theVTM-4 LOCK button while in first(1), second (2), or reverse (R) gearbelow 18 mph (30 km/h). This modeoverrides the auto system to sendmaximum torque to the rear axle.This mode is only intended forintermittent use at low speed to freeyour vehicle if it becomes stuck orwhen you encounter a steep gradewith one wheel on a slippery surface.Generally, you should first allow theauto mode to operate to adjust forthe available traction conditions.


Move the shift lever to D.

Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.

doany of the following:

The VTM-4 Lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). Theindicator in the button will remain on.

The vehicle speed must be below18 mph (30 km/h).

Move the shift lever to first (1),second (2), or reverse (R) gear.

1.

2.

3.

VTM-4 System

To Engage the VTM-4 Lock:

To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,

Driving

277

Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button ondry, paved roads. Driving on dry,paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON maydamage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noise andvibration can also result.

Do not continuously spin the f ront tiresof your vehicle. Continuously spinningthe f ront tires can cause transmissionor rear dif f erential damage.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２１：５２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８２　

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low, the sensor in thattire immediately sends a signal thatcauses the low tire pressureindicator and the appropriate tire onthe tire pressure monitor to come on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

360


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

278

０８／０６／０２　２０：２２：０１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８３　

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

The appropriate tire indicator andlow tire pressure indicator comes onif a tire becomes significantlyunderinflated. See

on page .

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tireinformation label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

349

350

278292


Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitor

Low TirePressure Indicator

Driving

279

０８／０６／０２　２０：２２：１２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８４　




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the indicated flat tire withthe compact spare tire (see page

).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tire

pressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

361


Changing a Tire with TPMS

280

０８／０６／０２　２０：２２：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８５　

CONTINUED

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly to the station, theninflate the tire to the recommendedpressure.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator may come on unexpectedly.

When the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator is on, one or more of yourtires is significantly underinflated.You should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure as indicatedon the vehicle’s tire informationplacard.

It is possible that the pressuresshown on the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.If the difference is significant or youcannot make the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and message on themulti-information display go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator in theinstrument panel to come on. If thishappens, you will see which tire islosing pressure on the multi-information display along with a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

361

On models with navigation system Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator


Driving

281

０８／０６／０２　２０：２２：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８６　

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when thevehicle is cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified on the vehicle placard andin the owner’s manual (see page

).

To select the tire pressure monitor,press the INFO button several timeswith the ignition switch in the ON(II) position.

You will see the above display on themulti-information display when alltire pressures are normal.

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. Or, ifyou check and adjust your tirepressure in cooler conditions, anddrive into extremely hot conditions,the tire may become overinflated.However, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on ifthe tires are overinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,this indicator begins to flash. It stopsflashing after approximately 1minute, then stays on. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

350

349

91

Tire Pressure Monitor


282

０８／０６／０２　２０：２２：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８７　

CONTINUED

To see the inflation pressures of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadianmodels).

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator in theinstrument panel to come on. If thishappens, you will see which tire islosing pressure on the multi-information display along with a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message.


Driving

283

U.S. models Canadian models

０８／０６／０２　２０：２２：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８８　

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the tire pressure monitor shows a‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’message and the tire pressurereadings are not displayed. If thishappens, you will first see a systemwarning message ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message onthe multi-information display.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Also, the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator begins to flash, then stayson (see page ).281


TPMS System Failure

284

０８／０６／０２　２０：２２：５０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２８９　

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on, or the multi-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,the VSA system automatically turnson even when the VSA system isturned off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch (see page ). If thishappens, you cannot turn the VSAsystem off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch again.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSsystem message will also bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay after several miles(kilometers) driving.

This indicator and the warningmessage on the multi-informationdisplay will go off, after several miles(kilometers) driving, when the sparetire is replaced with the specifiedregular tire equipped with the tirepressure monitor sensor.Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer ora qualified technician.


If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure/TPMS and tire monitorindicators will come on. Replace theindicated flat tire with the compactspare tire (see page ).

After the flat tire is replaced with thespare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on whiledriving. After several miles(kilometers) driving, this indicatorbegins to flash, then stays on again.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. This is normal;the system cannot monitor the sparetire pressure. Manually check thespare tire pressure to be sure it iscorrect.

292

361

CONTINUED


Changing a Tire with TPMSD

riving

285

０８／０６／０２　２０：２２：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９０　




Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Parking

Parking

286

０８／０６／０２　２０：２３：０５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９１　

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area in your vehicle orthe In-Bed Trunk, or take themwith you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on the driver’sdoor to verify that the securitysystem is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

On vehicles with security system

Parking

Parking TipsD

riving

287

０８／０６／０２　２０：２３：１４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９２　

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The emergencybrake assist system increases thestopping force when you depress thebrake pedal hard in an emergencysituation. The anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

288

０８／０６／０２　２０：２３：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９３　

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

376

91You should never pump the brake pedal.


CONTINUED

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

289

０８／０６／０２　２０：２３：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９４　

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

If this happens, you will also see‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ and‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’messages on the multi-informationdisplay.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

376


Important Safety Reminders

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

290

０８／０６／０２　２０：２３：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９５　

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA Activation indicator blink.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, seepage .

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on, see page .Or, if the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message with theindicator flashing, see page .

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

In this case, you cannot turn off theVSA using the OFF switch again.

91

281

278




VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ) System

Driving

291

０８／０６／０２　２０：２３：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９６　

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

This switch is above the parkingbrake release handle. To turn theVSA system on and off, press andhold it until you hear a beep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

353

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ) System

292

０８／０６／０２　２０：２３：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９７　

Your vehicle has been designed totow a trailer, as well as carryingpassengers and their cargo. Tosafely tow a trailer, you shouldcarefully observe the load limits (seepage ), use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe trailer and everything in or on itdepends on the number of occupantsin your vehicle and the type of trailerbeing towed (see page ).

Towing a trailer that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).

Be sure to read thesection on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

248

260

306

295

CONTINUED

Towing Weight Limits

Load Limits

Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines

Total Trailer Weight

Break-In Period

Driving

293

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２４：０４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９８　

－

－

－

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale (see page

).

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described.

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Thencheck the tables on page tomake sure you do not exceed thelimit for your conditions.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all accessories, all cargo,and the tongue load is 6,050 lbs(2,745 kg).

The maximumallowable weight on the vehicle axlesis 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg) on the frontaxle, and 3,245 lbs (1,475 kg) on therear axle.

The maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle and trailer is 10,088 lbs(4,575 kg) with the proper hitch.

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

The weight that the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts on the hitchshould follow the recommended loadguidelines (see page ). Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

295

293

295

Towing Weight Limits

Estimating LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR)

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR)

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

Tongue Load

294

０８／０６／０２　２０：２４：１４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０２９９　

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊－－

Number ofOccupants

2345

Max. Tongue LoadMax. Trailer Weight

Towing Weight Guidelines

Driving

295

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Guidelines:

600 lbs (272 kg)600 lbs (272 kg)570 lbs (258 kg)516 lbs (234 kg)

5,000 lbs (2268 kg)4,750 lbs (2155 kg)4,750 lbs (2155 kg)4,500 lbs (2041 kg)

Recommended tongue load should be 5 15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 10 15% of the total trailer weight for all othertrailers.

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cab, pickup bed, or In-Bed Trunk. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reducesthe maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page ).294

０８／０６／０２　２０：２４：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３００　

To accurately check your loads atthe public scale, the vehicle andtrailer should be fully loaded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehiclewhile the attendant watches thescale.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg)

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit: 6,050 lbs (2,745 kg)

Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

Check the gross combined weight.Limit: 10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

If you cannot weigh the rear axledirectly, you can calculate the reargross axle weight by subtractingthe weight in step 1 from theweight in step 2.Limit: 2,945 lbs (1,335 kg)

Check the rear gross axle weight.Limit: 3,252 lbs (1,475 kg)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Checking Loads

Towing a Trailer

296

０８／０６／０２　２０：２４：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０１　

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchaseHonda equipment whenever possible.

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed, maintained, andalso meets state, federal, province,and local regulations.

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in step 6 fromthe weight in step 7.Limit: See page .Recommended: see page .Range: 5-10% for boat trailers

8-15% for other trailers

Your dealer offers trailer packagesthat include a ball mount, hitch plug,and hitch pin. A wiring harness kit isalso available from your dealer.

Read the trailer manufacturer’sinstructions, and select theappropriate draw bar for the heightof the trailer you will be towing.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourvehicle, as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling, stability, and brakingperformance.

7.

8.

293

295295

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitch

Weight Distributing Hitch

Towing a Trailer

Driving

297

０８／０６／０２　２０：２４：３９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０２　

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

A factory installed, 4-pin grayconnector is located under theinstrument panel near the top of theparking brake pedal. This connectorhas all of the circuits required toinstall most electric trailer brakecontrollers. A jumper harness toadapt your electric trailer brakecontroller to the vehicle is includedwith the optional Genuine Hondatrailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailerhitch kit, see your dealer.

Have a qualified mechanic installyour trailer brake controllerfollowing the trailer brake controllermanufacturer’s instructions. Failureto properly install the trailer brakecontroller may increase the distanceit takes for you to stop your vehiclewhen towing a trailer.

Use this illustration to identify eachterminal in the trailer brakecontroller connector.

Honda recommends that any trailerwith a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more has its own brakes.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Trailer Brakes

Towing a Trailer

298

BRAKE(20A)(BLUE)

ELECTRIC BRAKE(BROWN/WHITE)

GROUND(BLACK)

STOP(SKY BLUE)

０８／０６／０２　２０：２４：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０３　

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. See page for propertire size, page for how to store afull size wheel and tire, and page

for information on changing aflat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

366353

361

Safety Chains

Sway Control

Trailer Mirrors

Spare Tires

Towing a Trailer

Driving

299

０８／０６／０２　２０：２４：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０４　

＋

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check trailerlight requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

Refer to the above illustration forwiring information.

We recommend that you have yourdealer install a Honda wiring harnessand converter. This harness hasbeen designed for your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with atrailer lighting connector.

Your vehicle is equipped with aconnector to install an optional trailerlighting connector that mates withyour vehicle. You can get thisoptional connector from your dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Except RT models

On RT models

Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

300

TAILLIGHTS(GREEN/BLACK)


RIGHT TURN SIGNALAND BRAKE LIGHTS(GREEN/RED)

GROUND(BLACK)

B CHARGE(GREEN)

LEFT TURN SIGNALAND BRAKE LIGHTS(GREEN/RED)

BACK-UP LIGHTS(BLUE)

０８／０６／０２　２０：２５：０２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０５　

CONTINUED

Insert the connector securely intothe socket.

Hook the retaining tab on theinner side of the lid against theretaining tab of the connector toprevent disconnection duringoperation.

Your vehicle has a class 3 trailerhitch as standard equipment. The 7-pin trailer connector is needed

for the trailer lights. To connect theconnector, do this:

Make sure the connector and thesocket are free of dirt, moisture,or other foreign material.

Open the socket lid by pulling it up.

Also see page for trailer-relatedinformation.

1.

2.

3.

4.

299

Except RT modelsTowing Equipment

Towing a Trailer

Connecting the Trailer ConnectorsD

riving

301

TRAILER HITCH

7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR

7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR

LID

RETAININGTAB

SOCKET

RETAINING TAB

０８／０６／０２　２０：２５：１２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０６　

＋

Refer to the above illustrations forwiring information.

The trailer jumper harness is used toinstall the controller for the electrictrailer brakes. For more information,see on page .

Insert the trailer brake fuse into thesecondary under-hood fuse box (seepage ).

298

381

Except RT models Except RT modelsTrailer Connector Sockets Trailer Jumper Harness

Trailer Brakes

Trailer Brake Fuse

Towing a Trailer

302

7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET

SMALLLIGHT(GREEN)

BCHARGE(BLACK)

BACK LIGHT(YELLOW)

GROUND(WHITE)

GROUND(BLACK)


LEFTTURN/STOP(RED)

RIGHTTURN/STOP(BROWN)

ELECTRICBRAKE(BLUE)

BRAKE(20A)(BLUE)

BRAKE LIGHTS(SKY BLUE)

０８／０６／０２　２０：２５：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０７　

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

Towing performance can beaffected by high altitude, hightemperature, or when climbingsteep grades. Therefore, premiumfuel (premium unleaded gasolinewith pump octane number of 91 orhigher) is recommended whentowing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590kg).

The trailer tires and spare are ingood condition and inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

Your vehicle tires and spare are ingood condition and properlyinflated.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelineson the following page.

CONTINUED

Driving Safely With a TrailerPre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

Driving

303

０８／０６／０２　２０：２５：３１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０８　

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and use D3. Do not‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.When towing a fixed-sided trailer(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph(88 km/h). At higher speeds, thetrailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

When towing a trailer on level roadsunder normal driving conditions, donot use D3. This will increase theautomatic transmission fluidtemperature and may causeoverheating.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses.

Allow more time and distance forbraking. Do not brake or turnsuddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,your vehicle has a higher center ofgravity. Drive slowly and cautiously,and allow more time and distance forbraking. Loading heavy cargo couldaffect your vehicle’s handling andperformance.

Remember, ittakes longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

Towing Speeds and Gears

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

304

０８／０６／０２　２０：２５：４１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３０９　

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left. Turnthe wheel to the right to move thetrailer to the right.

Do not park on an incline unless it isunavoidable. If you must park on anincline, follow the steps below tohelp prevent the vehicle and trailerfrom rolling and possibly injuringsomeone.

Turn the front wheels toward thecurb on a downhill, and away fromthe curb on an uphill.

With the foot brake fully pressed,have someone place wheel chockson the downhill side of the vehicleand trailer wheels.

Firmly apply the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle fromputting pressure on the parkingmechanism in the transmission. Italso makes it easier to move theshift lever out of Park when youwant to drive away.

When parking on level ground,follow all normal precautions (seepage ) including putting thetransmission in Park, and firmlysetting the parking brake.

If the vehicle’s tires slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4lock (see page ). DisengageVTM-4 lock as soon as the boat isout of the water to prevent damageto the VTM-4 system.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .

1.

2.

3.

286

276

383

bottom

Backing Up

Parking

Retrieving a Boat

Towing a Trailer

Towing Your Vehicle

Driving

305

０８／０６／０２　２０：２５：５１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１０　

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance and four-wheel drive VTM-4 system allow youto occasionally travel on unpavedroads and surfaces. Your vehicle isnot designed for trailblazing,mountain climbing, or otherchallenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

General Information

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

306

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２５：５６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１１　

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properlyand do not exceed your cargo loadlimits (see page and ).

Be aware that a heavy load canreduce ground clearance and yourability to clear obstacles.

Whenever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditions allow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

260 293

Check Out Your VehicleRememberImportant Safety Precautions


Driving

307

０８／０６／０２　２０：２６：０６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１２　

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second (2) gear willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow or ice.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

Your vehicle is not equipped withundercarriage guards to protect keycomponents, so take care to avoidrocks, tree stumps, and otherobstacles in your path.

Because your vehicle has a highercenter of gravity than a conventionalpassenger vehicle, driving a wheelover a tall object, or allowing a wheelto drop into a deep hole, can causeyour vehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

do not try toturn around

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles Driving on Slopes


308

０８／０６／０２　２０：２６：１３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１３　

The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

Before driving through water, stop,get out if necessary, and make surethat:

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed, and proceed without shifting,changing speeds, stopping, orshutting off the engine.

Do not try to cross water at highspeeds, as this may cause severedamage to the cooling system orresult in loss of control.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gently‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowlyuntil they operate normally.

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles, orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

If you get stuck, and cannot getunstuck with the VTM-4 system,engage the VTM-4 Lock (see page

), and carefully try to go in thedirection (forward or reverse) thatyou think will get you unstuck. Donot spin the tires at high speeds. Itwill not help you get out and maycause damage to the transmission orVTM-4 system.

If you are still unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose (see page ).383

276

CONTINUED

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream


Driving

309

０８／０６／０２　２０：２６：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１４　

Use a nylon strap to attach yourvehicle to the recovery vehicle, andcarefully take out the slack in thestrap. Once the strap is tight, therecovery vehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may safely tow a trailer off-roadif you follow these guidelines:

Do not exceed the trailer weightor tongue limits (see page ).

Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,and avoid driving in hilly terrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.

295

Towing a Trailer Off-Road


310

０８／０６／０２　２０：２６：３１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１５　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display or multi-information display (depending onmodels), and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 312....................Maintenance Minder . 313

..............................Fluid Locations . 325........................Adding Engine Oil . 326

Changing the Engine Oil and...........................................Filter . 327

..............................Engine Coolant . 329....................Windshield Washers . 330

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 331.................Rear Differential Fluid . 333

.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 333....................................Brake Fluid . 334

....................Power Steering Fluid . 335....................................Timing Belt . 336

.............................................Lights . 336................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 344

.....................................Floor Mats . 345..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 345

.................................Wiper Blades . 346...........................................Wheels . 348

...............................................Tires . 348...................Checking the Battery . 356

.............................Vehicle Storage . 357

407

Maintenance

Maintenance

311

０８／０６／０２　２０：２６：３６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１６　

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

312

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２６：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１７　

－－－－－－－－－－－－

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display or multi-information display (depending onmodels) to show you when youshould have your dealer performengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance services.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and press the SELECTbutton repeatedly until the engine oillife display appears (see page ).78

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

CONTINUED

On models without navigation systemEngine Oil Life Display

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

313

ENGINE OILLIFE DISPLAY


SELECT BUTTON

０８／０６／０２　２０：２６：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１８　

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicator reminds you that the timeis coming soon to take your vehiclein for the required maintenance.

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednear the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Maintenance Minder

314

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR ‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR


MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

０８／０６／０２　２０：２７：０３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３１９　

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative mileage isdisplayed and begins to blink afterthe vehicle has been driven 10 miles(10 km) or more.

Negative mileage means yourvehicle has passed the maintenancerequired point.

Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release theSELECT button on the dashboard.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

316

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

315


０８／０６／０２　２０：２７：１３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２０　

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described as follows.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:


To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer or the trip meter, pressand release the SELECT button.

Press the SELECT buttonrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

1.

2.324

On models without navigation system On models without navigation system

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Minder

316

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

０８／０６／０２　２０：２７：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２１　

CONTINUED

Press the TRIP/RESET button forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

Press the TRIP/RESET button foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and push and releasethe SEL/RESET button on thedashboard repeatedly, until theengine oil life is displayed (see page

).

3. 4.

83


Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

317


SEL/RESET BUTTON

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

０８／０６／０２　２０：２７：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２２　

▲ ▼

When the remaining engine oil life is15 percent or less, the display showsa ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ messagealong with the maintenance itemcode(s) for other scheduledmaintenance items needing service.

The system message indicator onthe instrument panel will also comeon, and a beeper will sound.

To cancel the system message, pressand release the INFO ( / ) buttonon the dashboard. At this time, thesystem message indicator will alsobe turned off. Then the display willchange to the engine oil life display.

Maintenance Minder

318

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR


０８／０６／０２　２０：２７：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２３　

▲ ▼You will also see the systemmessage every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position until you have the indicatedmaintenance performed by yourdealer.

The maintenance item code(s)indicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

When the remaining engine oil life isless than 5 percent, you will see theabove display. The display thenchanges to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’Have the indicated maintenancedone as soon as possible.

The system message indicator onthe instrument panel will also comeon, and a beeper will sound.

To cancel the system message, pressand release the INFO ( / ) buttonon the dashboard. At this time, thesystem message indicator will alsobe turned off. Then the display willchange to the engine oil life display.

You will also see the systemmessage every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position until you have the indicatedmaintenance performed by yourdealer.

321

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

319

０８／０６／０２　２０：２７：４３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２４　

▲ ▼▲ ▼

Negative mileage means yourvehicle has passed the maintenancerequired point.

The system message will appearagain by pressing the INFO ( / )button after canceling it.

You will also see the systemmessage every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position until you have the indicatedmaintenance performed by yourdealer.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .

If the indicated required service isnot done and the remaining engineoil life becomes 0%, the multi-information display will show a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,the total mileage after the remainingoil life became 0%, and themaintenance item code(s).

To cancel the system message, pressand release the INFO ( / ) buttonon the dashboard. At this time, thesystem message indicator will beturned off. Then the display willchange to the engine oil life display.

321

Maintenance Minder

not

320

Canada

U.S.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２７：５０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２５　

▲ ▼

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:


Press the SEL/RESET button onthe dashboard until you see theengine oil life display.

Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton for 10 seconds. The multi-information display will ask for aconfirmation.

If you are sure you want to resetthe display, press the SEL/RESET button to select ‘‘OK.’’

If you do not want to reset thedisplay, press the INFO ( / )button to select ‘‘Cancel.’’

1.

2.

3.

324

On models with navigation system On models with navigation system

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

321

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

０８／０６／０２　２０：２８：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２６　

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

322

０８／０６／０２　２０：２８：０５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２７　

＃

－

－

－

－

－

－

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the odometer/trip meter display or the multi-information display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

253

253

331

334

336

348

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance ChecksM

aintenance

323

０８／０６／０２　２０：２８：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２８　

＊

＊

＃

＃

－－

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

324

Maintenance Main Items

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check parking brake adjustment

Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission and transfer fluid

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid

Symbol Symbol

A

B

1

2

3

4

5

6

If the message, ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ or ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appearmore than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oilevery year.

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .323

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry and fromdiesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in higher level ofmechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requiresdifferential fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the maintenance minder. If youregularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

:

NOTE :

:

Main

tenance

Min

der

０８／０６／０２　２０：２８：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３２９　

＊

＊

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

325

: Under the gray cover RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

POWER STEERING FLUID(Red cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

０８／０６／０２　２０：２８：２８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３０　

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on the valve cover. Pour inthe oil slowly and carefully so you donot spill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Reinstall the engineoil fill cap, and tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes, and recheck theoil level on the engine oil dipstick.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

326

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

０８／０６／０２　２０：２８：３６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３１　

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the odometer/trip meter display or on the multi-information display.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay or multi-information display(depending on models). The oil andfilter collect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

327

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

０８／０６／０２　２０：２８：４５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３２　

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

9.

8.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

328

OIL FILTER

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２８：５４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３３　

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

329

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２９：０２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３４　

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

The washer level indicator will comeon when the level is low (see page

).

If the washer fluid is low, a‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

3.

4.

5.1.

2.

67



Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

330

RADIATOR CAP

０８／０６／０２　２０：２９：１３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３５　

CONTINUED

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on the informationdisplay or multi-information display(depending on models).

1.

2.

Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission FluidM

aintenance

331

DIPSTICK

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２９：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３６　

Insert the dipstick all the way backin the transmission.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug, thenadd the fluid into the fill hole tobring it to the level between theupper and lower marks on thedipstick.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid).

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

6.

5.

3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

332

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Donot mix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２９：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３７　

The rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display or multi-information display. This servicemay be needed more often undercertain driving conditions (see page

).

Always use Honda VTM-4Differential Fluid, and have yourdealer replace the rear differentialfluid.

The transfer assembly should bedrained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display or multi-information display.

Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 orGL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or80W-90, and have your dealerreplace the transfer assembly fluid.

324

Rear Differential Fluid Transfer Assembly Fluid

Rear Differential Fluid, Transfer Assembly Fluid

Maintenance

333

０８／０６／０２　２０：２９：３５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３８　

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Replace the brake fluid when thisservice is indicated on a maintenancemessage on the information displayor multi-information display(depending on models).

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

Brake Fluid

334

MAX

MIN

０８／０６／０２　２０：２９：４１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３３９　

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Remove the cover, then check thelevel on the side of the reservoirwhen the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark, and put thecover back in place.

Power Steering Fluid

Maintenance

335

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

COVER

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２９：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４０　

－－

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items on thepickup bed or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or other qualified technician.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance minder schedule.

Replace the timing belt every 60,000miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km(Canada) if you regularly drive yourvehicle in any of the followingconditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).Frequently towing a trailer.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight BulbTiming Belt

Timing Belt, Lights

336

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０８／０６／０２　２０：２９：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４１　

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulb.

Install the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber weather sealover the back of the headlightassembly. Make sure it is rightside up.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely. Turn on theheadlights to test the new bulb.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Lights

Maintenance

337

WEATHER SEAL

CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE

BULB

０８／０６／０２　２０：３０：０３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４２　

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.To change the passenger’s side

bulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

7.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Hazard/Parking Light Bulb

338

HOLDING CLIPS

BULB

SOCKET

０８／０６／０２　２１：３５：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４３　

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Remove the bolts and use the flat-tipped screwdriver to remove theholding clip located under thefront bumper.

Push down the inner fender.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

2.

3.

4.

1.

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing Front Fog/DaytimeRunning Light Bulbs

Maintenance

339

BOLTS INNER FENDER CONNECTOR

TABHOLDING CLIPHalogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３０：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４４　

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

Drop open the tailgate.

Remove the two bolts, and removethe rear light assembly from therear pillar.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: brake/taillight, turn signal/hazard light,or back-up light.

Install the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the lights to test the newbulb.

Reinstall the inner fender. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the front bumper.

Reinstall the holding clip, and pushin its head, then install the boltsand tighten them securely.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

340

BULB

SOCKET

０８／０６／０２　２０：３０：３１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４５　

Remove the three mountingscrews from the light assembly.

Remove the lens from the lightassembly.


Place a cloth on the edge of thelens segment. Remove each lenssegment by carefully prying on itsedge with a small flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Remove the screw under each lens.

Pull the high-mount brake lightassembly out of the vehicle.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Push the socket into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Install the rear light assembly inthe rear pillar. Tighten the twobolts securely.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

6.

7.

8.

9.

CONTINUED

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

341

LENS SEGMENT

SCREW

SCREW

BULB

０８／０６／０２　２０：３０：４３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４６　



Remove the license plate lightassembly by pulling it towards you,and then pulling the front edgeupward.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Put the lens back on the lightassembly, and tighten themounting bolts securely.


Put the light assembly back intothe vehicle. Install the screws andtighten them securely.Reinstall the lens segments.

1.

2.

3.

4.

8.

7.

9.

Lights

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

342

BULB

SOCKET

０８／０６／０２　２０：３０：５１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４７　



Remove the mounting screw fromthe bed light assembly.

Pull out the light assembly.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.


Reinstall the light assembly in thebumper.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Bed Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

343

SCREW

SCREW

BULB

SOCKET

０８／０６／０２　２０：３１：００　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４８　

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Reinstall the light assembly.


Reinstall the mounting screw, andtighten it securely.

6.

7.

8.

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

344

LOOP

０８／０６／０２　２０：３１：０７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３４９　

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward, possiblyinterfering with the pedals, orbackwards, making the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

A non-Honda floor mat may not fityour vehicle properly. This couldprevent the proper operation of thefolding rear seats and the passenger’sseat weight sensors. We recommendusing genuine Honda floor mats. Donot put additional floor mats on topof the anchored mats.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display or multi-information display (depending onthe models). It should be replacedevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if youdrive primarily in urban areas thathave high concentrations of soot inthe air, or if the flow from theheating and cooling system/climatecontrol system becomes less thanusual.

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

Floor Mats Dust and Pollen FilterM

aintenance

345

０８／０６／０２　２０：３１：１４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５０　

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

To replace a wiper blade:

To raise the wiper arm, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and activate the wipers(see page ). When the wipersare in the upright position, turnthe ignition switch off to stop thewipers in that position.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

1.

2.

94

Wiper Blades

346

WIPER ARMS

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the wiper arms.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３１：２１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５１　

CONTINUED

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull up firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

3. 4. 5.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

347

LOCK TAB

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

０８／０６／０２　２０：３１：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５２　

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm against thewindow.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and turn the wiperswitch off to return the wiper armsto the parked position.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keepsthe aluminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheelswith harsh chemicals (includingsome commercial wheel cleaners)or a stiff brush can damage theclear-coat. To clean the wheels,use a mild detergent and a softbrush or sponge.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

6.

7.

8.

9.

If equipped

Wiper Blades, Wheels, Tires

Wheels Tires

348

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３１：３８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５３　

CONTINUED

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on page .

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page or


350

278281

Tires

Inflation GuidelinesM

aintenance

349

０８／０６／０２　２０：３１：４８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５４　


The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

392

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Cold Tire PressureTire Size

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX, VPmodels

RTL models, and Canadian EX-L models

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tire Inspection

350

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P245/65R17 105T

P245/60R18 104T 32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０８／０６／０２　２０：３２：０７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５５　

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display or multi-information display (depending onmodels). Move the tires to thepositions shown in the diagram eachtime they are rotated. If youpurchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

392

Tire RotationTire MaintenanceTire Service Life

TireLabeling

Tires

Maintenance

351

Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３２：１７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５６　

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the ABS or VSA system toactivate.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

352

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３２：２４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５７　

＋Wheels: If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Tires:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

390

392

RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX,VP models

RTL models, and Canadian EX-Lmodels

RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX,VP models

RTL models, and Canadian EX-Lmodels

Tires

Wheel and Tire Specifications Snow TiresWinter DrivingM

aintenance

353

P245/65R17 105T

17 x 7 1/2 J

18 x 7 1/2 J

P245/60R18 104T

０８／０６／０２　２０：３２：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５８　

＃

＊

＃

＃

＊

This tire chain is available at manyauto supply stores. To find a localstore that carries the chain, callQuality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.To order the tire chain online, go to

, and enter yourvehicle information. When you installthe chains, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions, and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withthe chains installed.

Rubber chain adjusters, ortensioners, must be used toprevent the chains fromcontacting the body or thechassis.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow.

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed. Ifyou hear them contacting the bodyor chassis, stop and investigate.Make sure the chains are installedtightly, and that they are notcontacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove the chains assoon as you start driving on clearedroads.

:

Premium Cobra Cable Chain1046P with accessory adjusters

SCC Super Z-6 SZ-429

www.chainquest.com

On RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX,VP models

On RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX,VP models

On RTL models, and Canadian EX-Lmodels

Tires

Premium Cobra Cable Chain1046P with accessory

adjusters

Tire Chains

354

０８／０６／０２　２０：３２：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３５９　

If you ever hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stopand investigate. If the chains haveloosened, retighten them. Make surethey do not contact the brake linesor suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as youbegin driving on cleared roads.

Tires

Maintenance

355

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３２：４５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６０　

－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

356

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３２：５２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６１　

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all door,In-Bed Trunk lid, and tailgate seals.Also, apply a vehicle body wax tothe painted surfaces that matewith the door, In-Bed Trunk lidand tailgate seals.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset the time,see page .

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem may disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio you willsee ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.Use the preset bars to enter the code(see page ).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Fill the fuel tank.

205

204

CONTINUED



Vehicle Storage

Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

357

０８／０６／０２　２１：３５：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６２　

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Vehicle Storage

358

０８／０６／０２　２０：３３：０８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６３　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 360....................Changing a Flat Tire . 361

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 369................................Jump Starting . 370

..............If the Engine Overheats . 372.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 374..........Charging System Indicator . 374

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 375...............Brake System Indicator . 376

..............................................Fuses . 378..............................Fuse Locations . 381

......................Emergency Towing . 383..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 383

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

359

０８／０６／０２　２０：３３：１１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６４　

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on acompact spare.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with the compactspare tire. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

After the flat tire is replaced with thespare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on. Afterseveral miles (kilometers) drivingwith the spare, this indicator beginsto flash, then stays on again. You willalso see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).284



Compact Spare Tire

360

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０８／０６／０２　２０：３３：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６５　

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchit.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

If you tow a trailer frequently, werecommend that you use a regulartire as a spare. You can store theregular size spare tire on the tire tray,but store the tool kit at the side ofthe In-Bed Trunk (see page ),and secure it.

2.1.

367CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

361

TOOL BOX

SPARE TIRE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３３：２８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６６　

Open the In-Bed Trunk.

Remove the two tire tray holdingbolts.

Pull out the tire tray with thehandle, and hook the rear of thetire tray to the guides on the backedge of the In-Bed Trunk.

Unfasten the strap to remove thetool box, and unscrew the wingbolt.

Take out the compact spare tire.If you are using a cargo net or acargo cover in the In-Bed Trunk,remove it before pulling out the tiretray.

4.

3. 5. 6.

7.


362

TIRE TRAY HOLDING BOLTS

WING BOLT

TOOL BOX STRAPTIRETRAY

０８／０６／０２　２０：３３：３７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６７　

CONTINUED

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange.

Turn the dial at the bottom of thejack clockwise until the top of thejack contacts the jacking point.Make sure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

8. 9. 10.


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

363

JACKING POINT DIAL

０８／０６／０２　２０：３３：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６８　

Attach the stay to the extension,then attach the wheel nut wrenchto the end of the extension.

Turn the jack dial (wheel nutwrench) clockwise as shown toraise the vehicle until the flat tireis off the ground.

Make sure the stay, the extension,and the wheel nut wrench aresecurely attached.

Insert the hook at the end of thestay into the opening on the dial atthe bottom of the jack.

11. 12. 13.


364

EXTENSION

CONNECTOR BUTTON

DIAL

CONNECTOR BUTTON WHEEL NUT WRENCH

HOOK

STAY

０８／０６／０２　２０：３３：５１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３６９　

CONTINUED

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

The wheel cap cannot be removedwithout first removing the wheelnuts.

Remove the wheel nuts and thewheel cap (on RT and CanadianDX models) then remove the flattire. Handle the wheel nutscarefully; they may be hot fromdriving. Place the flat tire on theground with the outside surfacefacing up.

14. 15.

16.

17.

On RT and Canadian DX models


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

365

BRAKE HUB

WHEEL CAP

RT/DX model is shown.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３３：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７０　

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face up on thetire tray.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Release the tire tray and slide itback in place.

Tighten the tire tray holding boltssecurely.

Remove the center cap from theflat tire.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

On RTS, RTL, and Canadian VP, EX-Lmodels


366

WING BOLT

SPACER CONEFor normaltire

For sparetire

94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

０８／０６／０２　２０：３４：０９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７１　

Store the wheel cap or center capin the In-Bed Trunk. Make sure itdoes not get scratched ordamaged.

When storing the flat tire, placethe tool box at the right side of theIn-Bed Trunk as shown.

Store the jack and the tools in thetool box.

Refer to(see page or ).

25.

26.

27.

28.280 285


Changing a Tire withTPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

367

TOOL BOX

Loose items can be thrown outof the vehicle in a crash andcould seriously injure theoccupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３４：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７２　

As a temporary mounting location,you can secure a spare tire on thepickup bed, if needed.

Place the spare tire on the pickupbed as shown.

Place the spacer cone in the wheelhub, and secure the spare tire tothe pickup bed with the wing bolt.

If you remove the spare tire from thepickup bed, reinstall the clip backinto its hole.

Remove the clip by pushing thecenter of its top.

Remove the spare tire from thetire tray (see page ).

Store or secure the tool box.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.362


Securing a Spare Tire on thePickup Bed

368

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

０８／０６／０２　２０：３４：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７３　

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

Check these things:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

370

383

356

370

101

CONTINUED

Jump Starting The Starter Operates Normally

Emergency Towing

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

369

０８／０６／０２　２０：３４：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７４　

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

Turn off all electrical accessories:heater, A/C, climate control, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in Park, and set theparking brake.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

270

378

383

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

370

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３４：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７５　

－

＋

＋

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

4.

6.

7.

5.

3.

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

371

BOOSTERBATTERY

０８／０６／０２　２０：３４：５２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７６　

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.If it climbs to the red mark, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

1.

2.

3.

If the Engine Overheats

372

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３４：５９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７７　

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

383

383

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

373

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３５：０８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７８　

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display whenthis indicator comes on.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

253

326

383

90On models with navigation system


Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

374

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３５：１８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３７９　

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

The indicator may also come on withthe ‘‘D’’ indicator.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

You will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).90




Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

375

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３５：２５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８０　

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It cantake several days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, and as a reminderto check the parking brake. It willstay on if you do not fully release theparking brake.

400

334

Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

Brake System Indicator

Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator

376

U.S. Canada

０８／０６／０２　２０：３５：３２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８１　

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUIDLOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

90

90

383



EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

377

０８／０６／０２　２０：３５：３９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８２　

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The primary under-hood fuse box ison the passenger’s side. Thesecondary fuse box is next to thebrake fluid reservoir. To open them,push the tabs as shown.

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, put your finger inthe notch on the lid, and pull itoutward slightly, then pull it towardyou and take it out of its hinges.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages and , or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuse or fuses control that device.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

381 382

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

378

UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)INTERIOR

NOTCH

０８／０６／０２　２０：３５：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８３　

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse boxes and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the sidewindow at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.Remove the cover from the fuse

box.

4.3.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

379

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

BLOWNFUSE

０８／０６／０２　２０：３５：５５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８４　

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window may be disabled. Toreset the AUTO function, see page

.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace the fusewith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset bars to enterthe code (see page ).

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

5.

6.

128

204

Fuses

380

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the properrating f or the circuit, install one witha lower rating.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３６：０２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８５　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

＋

＊

＊ If equipped

If equipped

123456789

101112

123456

Back LightVSA FSRVSA MTRVTM-4Front Accessory SocketsElectric Brake

13141516171819202122

23

789

1011

Small LightsStop/Turn LightsChargeTPMSMoonroof

Left Headlight Low BeamNot UsedLeft Headlight High BeamSmall LightsRight Headlight High BeamRight Headlight Low BeamBack UpFI ECU (PCM)DBWFront Fog LightHeated SeatMG Clutch

10 A

10 A15 A10 A10 A

7.5 A15 A15 A20 A15 A

7.5 A

(7.5 A)20 A40 A20 A15 A

(20 A)

(20 A)(7.5 A)(20 A)7.5 A(20 A)

20 A20 A40 A15 A40 A20 A30 A30 A40 A40 A

120 A60 A50 A

Horn, StopDefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardOption 1AC InverterCooling FanCondenser FanHeater MotorSeatBattery

B IGI MainPower WindowSpare Fuses

:

:

No.

No. Circuits Protected

No.


Circuits ProtectedAmps.

Amps. Amps.

Amps. Circuits Protected

24 28

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

381

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０８／０６／０２　２０：３６：１３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８６　

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

＊

No.


No. Amps.Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedSTS

Amps.

Amps.

12345678910

If equipped

1112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

IG, WiperNot UsedDriver’s Power Seat LumbarDriver’s Power Seat SlidingNot UsedDriver’s Power Seat RecliningNot UsedIG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGPLeft Rear WindowRight Rear WindowPassenger’s WindowBack WindowDriver’s WindowVBSOL2IG HACIG VSA/ABSACCNot Used

1 7.5 ABed LightsIG CoilDaytime Running LightLAFRadioInterior LightsBack UpDoor LockRear Accessory SocketOPDS

7.5 A15 A10 A15 A20 A10 A7.5 A20 A10 A7.5 A

30 A

(10 A)(20 A)

(20 A)

15 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A10 A

7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

7.5 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A

(7.5 A)

:

Fuse Locations

382

INTERIOR FUSE BOX UPPER AREAINTERIOR FUSE BOX

Driver’s Side

０８／０６／０２　２０：３６：２３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８７　

CONTINUED

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see the previous page).

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thetie down hooks on the lower of thefront and rear bumpers.

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

If Your Vehicle Gets StuckTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

383

FRONT

REAR

TIE DOWNHOOK

TIE DOWNHOOK

‘‘Rocking’’ your vehicle betweenf orward and reverse gear or revving upthe engine and allowing the wheels tospin f reely at high speeds can damagethe automatic transmission. Use a towservice to prevent transmission damage.

Towing your vehicle with two tires onthe ground will damage parts of the4WD system. It should be transportedon a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３６：３２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８８　

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

384

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe tie down hooks f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. These hooks should not be usedf or open-road towing.

０８／０６／０２　２０：３６：３６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３８９　

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 386................................Specifications . 388

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 390

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 390.................................Treadwear . 390

......................................Traction . 390.............................Temperature . 391

.................................Tire Labeling . 392Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 394

.......................Emissions Controls . 397.....................The Clean Air Act . 397

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 397

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 397

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 397

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 398....................PGM-FI System . 398

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 398

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 398

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 398

....................Replacement Parts . 398..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 399

........................Emissions Testing . 400

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

385

０８／０６／０２　２０：３６：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９０　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

386

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

０８／０６／０２　２０：３６：４４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９１　

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

387

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０８／０６／０２　２０：３６：４８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９２　

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

388

Dimensions

Seating Capacities

Air Conditioning

Capacities

Weights

206.9 in (5,255 mm)77.8 in (1,976 mm)70.3 in (1,786 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

122.0 in (3,100 mm)67.1 in (1,705 mm)66.9 in (1,700 mm)

See the tire information labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb.

The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

1,530 lbs (690 kg)1,480 lbs (670 kg)

10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)

TotalFrontRear

523

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)19.4 21.2 oz (550 600 g)

ND-OIL8

22.01 US gal (83.3 )1.64 US gal (6.2 )2.14 US gal (8.1 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )3.3 US qt (3.1 )8.5 US qt (8.0 )

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluid

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 )Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

2.79 US qt (2.64 )3.01 US qt (2.85 )

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)Maximum load limit(Payload)

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

1 :

2 :3 :

On vehicles without moonroof or navigation systemOn vehicles with moonroof and navigation system

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

1

2

3

1

2

０８／０７／１８　１６：２２：２９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９３　

－－

－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

389

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Capacities

Lights

Battery

Tires

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )

10.0 : 1ILZKR7B11SXU22HCR11

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

0°50’0°50’

1°53’

P245/65R17 105T

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,V6 gasoline engine

TransferassemblyfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

0.45 US qt (0.43 )0.48 US qt (0.45 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

HeadlightsFront turn signal/parking/hazard lightsDaytime running lightFog lightRear turn signal/hazard lightsBrake/TaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightsIndividual map lights

Bed lightsConsole compartment lightGlove box lightVanity mirror lightDoor courtesy lights

12 V 60/55 W (HB2)12 V 28/8 W

12 V 21 W12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

21/5 W18 W3 CP3 CP8 W5 W3 CP1.4 W3.4 W2 W3.8 W

Capacity 12 V12 V

72 AH/20 HR60 AH/5 HR

Size

Pressure60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T165/90R17 105M

12 V 55 W12 V 60 W

P245/60R18 104T

See page 382 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid under the dashboard.See page 381 or the fuse box lid.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

FrontRear

NGK:DENSO:

High/Low

ChangeTotal

Front/Rear

SpareFront/RearSpare

1 :2 :

U.S. RT, RTS models, and Canadian DX, VP modelsU.S. RTL models, and Canadian EX-L models

(HB3)(H11)

1

2

０８／０６／０２　２０：３７：３４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９４　

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear Traction

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

390

０８／０６／０２　２０：３７：４２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９５　

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TemperatureTechnicalInform

ation

391

０８／０６／０２　２０：３７：４７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. The following is anexample of tire size with anexplanation of what each componentmeans.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

R

65

245

P

17

105

T

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

392

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)(2)(3)(4)

(4) (3) (2)

(1)

(1)

Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Size

Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

P245/65R17 105T

０８／０６／０２　２０：３７：５７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９７　

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

Max Press The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

Max Load The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

WeekYearDate of manufacture.

Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that thetire meets allrequirements of the U.S.Department ofTransportation.

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN) Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Labeling

TechnicalInform

ation

393

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

０８／０６／０２　２０：３８：０８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９８　

－

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

All Models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

394

０８／０６／０２　２０：３８：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０３９９　

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.



TechnicalInform

ation

395

０８／０６／０２　２０：３８：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４００　

－

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.



396

０８／０６／０２　２０：３８：２５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０１　

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

324

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

397

０８／０６／０２　２０：３８：３３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０２　

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

398

０８／０６／０２　２０：３８：４２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０３　

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

399

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTERS

０８／０６／０２　２０：３８：４９　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０４　

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

400

０８／０６／０２　２０：３８：５７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０５　

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

8.

9.

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

401

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：０１　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０６　

402

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：０４　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０７　

....Customer Service Information . 404....................Warranty Coverages . 405

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 406

.....................Authorized Manuals . 407

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

403

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：０７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０８　

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle identification number (seepage )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, andtelephone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

386

Customer Service Information

404

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：１６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４０９　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100% credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2009 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2009 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

405

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：２５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１０　

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

406

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１１　

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)A

uthorizedM

anuals

407

Publication

Form Number

61SJC03

61SJC03EL

61SJC30

31SJC630

31SJC820

31SJCQ30

31SJCM30

HON-R

Form Description

2006-2009 Honda Ridgeline Service Manual

2009 Honda Ridgeline

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2006 Model Series Ridgeline

Body Repair Manual

2009 Honda Ridgeline Owner’s Manual

2009 Honda Ridgeline Navigation Manual

2009 Honda Ridgeline Quick Start Guide

2009 Ridgeline Honda Service History

Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate

Year and Model Desired

www. helminc. com

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１２　

408

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：４２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１３　

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 257ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.....................................Position) . 102............Accessory Power Sockets . 139

...........................AC Power Outlet . 141................Active Head Restraints . 124

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 327........Adjusting the Steering wheel . 99

...........................Advanced Airbags . 27...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 23

..............Air Conditioning System . 146.................................Usage . 147, 153

Air Outlets...............(Vents) . 148, 151, 155, 156

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 350......................................Antifreeze . 329

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 66, 289

...................................Operation . 289..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 204

Anti-theft Steering Column............................................Lock . 102

........................................Armrests . 122................Audio System . 159, 167, 173

...Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 104Automatic Heated Wiper

..............................Zone . 95, 150, 156...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 21

.............Automatic Speed Control . 207..............Automatic Transmission . 271

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 388...............Checking Fluid Level . 331

.......................................Shifting . 271Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 271................Shift Lever Positions . 272

....................Shift Lock Release . 275......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 203

Back Window.......................................Indicator . 75...........................Operation . 128, 129

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 63, 374............................Jump Starting . 370

..............................Maintenance . 356............................Specifications . 389

Bed Lights.......................................Indicator . 74...................................Operation . 144

..............................Before Driving . 247....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 20

.........................Beverage Holders . 137.......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 217

..................................Booster Seats . 52Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 289.............Break-in, New Linings . 248

...........................................Fluid . 334............Bulb Replacement . 340, 341

.......................................Parking . 132.................System Indicator . 65, 376........................Wear Indicators . 288

.............................Braking System . 288.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 248

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 98

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：４８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１４　

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 340

..............................Brake Lights . 340.................................Bed Lights . 343

.........Daytime Running Lights . 339.................................Fog Lights . 339

Front Turn Signal /Parking/.......................Hazard Lights . 338

.................................Headlights . 336.........High-mount Brake Light . 341

.................License Plate Lights . 342Rear Bulbs (Brake/Taillights,

Turn Signal/Hazard Lights,................Back-up Lights) . 340

............................Specifications . 389......................Bulbs, Halogen . 336, 339

...................Capacities Chart . 388, 389.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 55

.........................Cargo Hooks . 118, 137.............................Carrying Cargo . 259

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii.........................................CD Care . 198

..........................CD Changer . 181, 189

CD Player/Changer Error...................................Messages . 201

.......................................CD Player . 175........................Certification Label . 386

....................................Chains, tire . 354Change Oil

........................................How to . 327......................................When to . 313

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 361...Charging System Indicator . 63, 374

............Checklist, Before Driving . 269................Childproof Door Locks . 104

.....................................Child Safety . 34..............................Booster Seats . 52

...................................Child Seats . 41.....Important Safety Reminders . 34

..........................................Infants . 39..........................Larger Children . 51

.........................................LATCH . 43......................Risks with Airbags . 35

.............................Small Children . 40....................................Tether . 43, 48

.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 35.......................................Child Seats . 41

.........................................LATCH . 43..........Tether Anchorage Points . 48

...............Climate Control System . 152..............................................Clock . 205

....................................Coat Hooks . 138.....................Code, Audio System . 204

........................CO in the Exhaust . 397......................Compact Spare Tire . 360

.........................................Compass . 210.................Console Compartment . 136.................Consumer Information . 404

.............Controls, Instruments and . 59Coolant

........................................Adding . 329....................................Checking . 253

.........................Proper Solution . 329...................Temperature Gauge . 76

..............................Courtesy Light . 143Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 397Cruise Control

.......................................Indicator . 67...................................Operation . 207...................................Cup Holders . 137

.............Customer Service Office . 404

Index

C

II

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：５２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１５　

＊

＊

CONTINUED

..............................Economy, Fuel . 254..................................Emergencies . 359

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 370...........Brake System Indicator . 376

................Changing a Flat Tire . 361.....Charging System Indicator . 374

..................Checking the Fuses . 378.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 99.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 374...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 375

..................Overheated Engine . 372............................Stuck Vehicle . 383

.......................................Towing . 383.........................Emergency Brake . 132.......................Emissions Controls . 397........................Emissions Testing . 400

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 76

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 63, 375

.................Oil Life Display . 313, 317........Oil Pressure Indicator . 63, 374..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 326

...............................Overheating . 372............................Specifications . 389............................Speed Limiter . 275

.......................................Starting . 270.................Engine, if it won’t start . 369

Evaporative Emissions Control........................................System . 397

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 55Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 398Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18

..........................Fan, Interior . 147, 154.........................................Features . 145

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 60

................Daytime Running Lights . 97.................................Dead Battery . 370

.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 406......Defrosting the Windows . 150, 155

................Differential Fluid, Rear . 333....................................Dimensions . 388

...............Dimming the Headlights . 95Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 331..................................Engine Oil . 253

..........................Directional Signals . 95........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 288

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 328.Door and Tailgate Open Monitor . 11

DoorsLocking and

..............Unlocking . 103, 104, 107..................Lockout Prevention . 103

....................Power Door Locks . 103........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 390...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 267....................................Economy . 254

...................................................D3 . 273Dual-Action Tailgate

...............................Indicator . 11, 115...................................Operation . 113

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 345

Index

E

F

DIN

DE

X

III

０８／０６／０２　２０：３９：５８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１６　

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 254Gasoline

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 68...........................................Gauge . 76

................Octane Requirement . 248........................Tank, Filling the . 249

................Gas Station Procedures . 249Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 76...............................................Fuel . 76

...............................Speedometer . 76

.................................Tachometer . 76GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 294GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

.......................................Rating) . 294............Gearshift Lever Positions . 272

......................................Glove Box . 138GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 294

....Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 336, 339...........................HandsFreeLink . 217

..............................HFL Buttons . 218..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 99

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 249Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 345...............................................Oil . 328

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 99...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 361

.....................................Floor Mats . 345Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 331..........................................Brake . 334

..........................Power Steering . 335.......................Rear Differential . 333

...................Transfer Assembly . 333..................Windshield Washer . 330

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 165

.................Folding the Rear Seats . 125........................................Fog Lights . 97

..........................Four-way Flashers . 99..............................Front Seat . 119, 121............................Adjusting . 119, 121

.....................................Airbags . 9, 25

.......................................Heaters . 126.................................................Fuel . 248

......................Fill Door and Cap . 249...........................................Gauge . 76

................Octane Requirement . 248...............................Oxygenated . 248

........................Reserve Indicator . 68........................Tank, Filling the . 249

...............................Fuel Economy . 254Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates.......................Comparison . 254

......Calculating Fuel Economy . 256.............Fuel Economy Factors . 255

........Improving Fuel Economy . 255.....................Fuses, Checking the . 378

Index

G

H

IV

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：０２　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１７　

CONTINUED...Identification Number, Vehicle . 386

Ignition............................................Keys . 100

.........................................Switch . 102............Timing Control System . 398

......................Immobilizer System . 101.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.................................In-Bed Trunk . 116..................Emergency Opener . 117

............................Open Indicator . 75.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61

...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 66.......................A/T Temperature . 69

....................Back Window Open . 75.............................Bed Lights On . 74

Brake (Parking and Brake....................................System) . 65

........................Charging System . 63.............................Cruise Control . 67

.................................Cruise Main . 67...................................Door Open . 75

DRL (Daytime Running......................................Lights) . 67

...................................High Beam . 67....................In-Bed Trunk Open . 75

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 66.....................................Lights On . 69

......................................Low Fuel . 68........................Low Oil Pressure . 63......................Low Tire Pressure . 72

..................Maintenance Minder . 71Malfunction Indicator Lamp

.......................................(MIL) . 63...........................Side Airbag Off . 64

.......................................Seat Belt . 62..........................Security System . 68

...............................................SRS . 64..............................Tailgate Open . 75.......................TPMS System . 72, 73

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 66

............................VSA Activation . 71.................................VSA System . 70

..........................................VTM-4 . 70..............................Washer Level . 67

..................Individual Map Lights . 143...............................Infant Restraint . 39

......................................Infant Seats . 39...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 349

.................................Headlights . 94, 95........................................Aiming . 336

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 96.................................Control Dial . 95

............Daytime Running Lights . 97..................High Beam Indicator . 67

.....High Beams, Turning on . 94, 95............Low Beams, Turning on . 95

.........................Reminder Chime . 96Replacing Halogen

..............................Bulbs . 336, 339..................................Turning On . 95

............................Head Restraints . 122.............................Heated Mirrors . 134

...............................Heaters, Seats . 126.............Heating and Cooling . 147, 153

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 94HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 213.......................Hood, Opening the . 252

..............................................Horn . 4, 93

Index

IND

EX

I

V

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：０７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１８　

................Jacking Up the Vehicle . 363.......................................Jack, Tire . 363

................................Jump Starting . 370

................................................Keys . 100

.......................Label, Certification . 386.................Lane Change, Signaling . 95

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21...........................Light Control Dial . 95

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 336

.......................................Indicator . 69.......................................Interior . 142.........................................Parking . 95

..................................Turn Signal . 95............................Load Limits . 260, 293

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 102Locks

.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 102............................Fuel Fill Door . 249

..................................Glove Box . 138.............................In-Bed Trunk . 116

..................Lockout Prevention . 103...............................Power Door . 103

........................Low Coolant Level . 253.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 68

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 63, 374Lubricant Specifications

..................................Chart . 388, 389...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 259

..................................Maintenance . 311Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 323................................Minder . 313-324

.........................Minder Indicator . 71..........................................Safety . 312

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 63, 375............Manual Seat Adjustments . 119

...............................Meters, Gauges . 76........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 134

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 258.......................................Moonroof . 131

.............Multi-Information Display . 82............Engine Oil Life Display . 317

...........Maintenance Items . 321, 324

...................Neutral Gear Position . 273..................New Vehicle Break-in . 248

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 386

........................Information Display . 77.........Engine Oil Life Indicator . 313

...........Maintenance Items . 316, 324.................................Inside Mirror . 133

.............................Inspection, Tire . 350........................Instrument Panel . 4, 93

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 98...............................Interior Lights . 142

........................................Introduction . i

Index

J

K

L

M

N

VI

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：１５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４１９　

CONTINUED

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 248.........................................Odometer . 76

....................Off-Highway Driving . 306...................Off-Road Precautions . 307

Oil........................Change, How to . 327......................Change, When to . 313......................Checking Engine . 253

...........................................Filter . 328..............Pressure Indicator . 63, 374

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 326

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 102............................Outside Mirrors . 134

....................Overheating, Engine . 372....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 323

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 248

..............Panel Brightness Control . 98........................Park Gear Position . 272

...........................................Parking . 286...............................Parking Brake . 132

.................................Parking Lights . 95..Parking Over Things that Burn . 287

.............................PGM-FI System . 398Pickup Bed

.........................Carrying Cargo . 259.........................................Lights . 144

..............Power Seat Adjustments . 121...............Power Socket Locations . 139

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 34

.....................General Guidelines . 34.......................Protecting Infants . 39

.......Protecting Larger Children . 51.........Protecting Small Children . 40

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 48

.............................Using LATCH . 43

...................Radiator Overheating . 372Radio/CD Sound

.......................System . 159, 167, 173

.................Rear Differential Fluid . 333..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 340

...........................Rearview Mirror . 133..Rearview Mirror with Compass . 210

....................Rear (Back) Window . 129.....Reclining the Seat-Backs . 120, 121

................Remote Audio Controls . 202.....................Remote Transmitter . 110

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 327

..........................................Fuses . 378................................Light Bulbs . 336

........................................Minder . 324................................Timing Belt . 336

...........................................Tires . 361.............................Wiper Blades . 346

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 22

...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 253..................Reverse Gear Position . 272

................................Rotation, Tire . 351

Index

IND

EX

PR

O

VII

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：２０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４２０　

＊

＊

＊

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 20.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 406

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 11..........................Head Restraints . 15

.................................Seat Belts . 8, 20...........Seats and Seat-Backs . 13, 14

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 56..............................Safety Messages . iii

...................Satellite Radio, XM . 167.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 20

...............Additional Information . 20Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 21.....................................Cleaning . 344

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21................................Maintenance . 22

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 20, 62

...................System Components . 20...............Use During Pregnancy . 18

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16.........................Seating Capacities . 388

...............................................Seats . 119............Adjusting the Seat . 119, 121

.............Folding the Rear Seats . 125........................Head Restraints . 122

........................................Heater . 126............................Security System . 206

...............................Serial Number . 386...........................Service Intervals . 324

......Service Manual, Purchasing . 407.........Service Station Procedures . 249

Shifting the Automatic.............................Transmission . 271

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 271........................Shift Lock Release . 275

................................Side Airbags . 9, 28................Side Curtain Airbags . 10, 30

Side Marker (Parking)...Lights, Bulb Replacement in . 338

...............................Signaling Turns . 95.....................................Snow Tires . 353

................Sound System . 159, 167, 173Spare Tire

..............................Inflating . 350, 360....................Specifications . 353, 389

....................Specifications Charts . 388................................Speed Control . 207

...................................Speedometer . 76..........SRS, Additional Information . 23

...Additional Safety Precautions . 33......Airbag System Components . 23

.............................Airbag Service . 32How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 30.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 64

..START (Ignition Key Position) . 102.......................Starting the Engine . 270

................With a Dead Battery . 370........Steam Coming from Engine . 372

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 99

...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 102...Stereo Sound System . 159, 167, 173....................Storing Your Vehicle . 357

................................Stuck Vehicle . 383

Index

S

VIII

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：２５　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４２１　

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

........................................Sun Visor . 140........................Sunglasses Holder . 138

Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)

......................................Servicing . 32.........................SRS Indicator . 30, 64

...................System Components . 23..................................Synthetic Oil . 327

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 359

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 390

.....................................Tachometer . 76Tailgate, Dual-Action

...............................Indicator . 11, 115...................................Operation . 113

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 340.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 359

Technical Descriptions....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 390.....Emissions Control Systems . 397

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 399

.......................Temperature Gauge . 76...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 21

............................Theft Protection . 204..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 399

....................................Timing Belt . 336

....................................Tire Chains . 354.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 361

.................................Tire Labeling . 392Tire Pressure Monitoring

....................System (TPMS) . 278Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 72, 278Required Federal

............................Explanation . 394.............Tire Pressure Monitor . 279

....TPMS Indicator . 72, 73, 279, 281...............................................Tires . 348

..............................Air Pressure . 350.........................Checking Wear . 350..........................Compact Spare . 360

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 390......................................Inflation . 349

..................................Inspection . 350..............................Maintenance . 351

...................................Replacing . 352......................................Rotating . 351

...........................................Snow . 353....................Specifications . 353, 389

................................Tire Chains . 354...................Tools, Tire Changing . 361

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 296

................Emergency Wrecker . 383.................................Equipment . 301

....Equipment and Accessories . 297.............................Weight Limit . 293

.........................Trailer Loading . 295.................Trailer Towing Tips . 303

.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 333Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 331...........................Fluid Selection . 332

..............Identification Number . 387.............Shifting the Automatic . 271

.....................................Treadwear . 390

.................................Trip Meter . 79, 84................................Trunk, In-Bed . 116

....................................Turn Signals . 95

Index

U

T

IND

EX

IX

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：３０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４２２　

＊

＊

＊

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 248.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 328

................................Vanity Mirror . 140.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 260, 388

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 388....Vehicle Identification Number . 386

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )....................................System . 291

...VSA Activation Indicator . 71, 291.........................VSA Off Switch . 292

........VSA System Indicator . 70, 291.............................Vehicle Storage . 357

.....................................Ventilation . 149.................................................VIN . 386

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 326

..................................VTM-4 Lock . 276

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 56

..................Warranty Coverages . 405

Washer, Windshield........Checking the Fluid Level . 330

............................Level Indicator . 67.....................................Operation . 94

...........................................Wheels . 348...............Adjusting the Steering . 99

......................................Wrench . 364Windows

................Operating the Power . 128Windshield

...........................Defroster . 148, 155.......................................Washers . 94

...Wiper Zone, Heated . 95, 150, 156Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 346.....................................Operation . 94

....................................Worn Tires . 350.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 383

....................XM Satellite Radio . 167

: U.S. only

Index

X

V

W

X

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：３６　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４２３　

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：３８　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４２４　

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：４０　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４２５　

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：４３　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４２６　

Service Information Summary

Gasoline: Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )Front/Rear:

Compact Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

22.01 US gal (83.3 )

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid)(see page ).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid(see page ).

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosityhypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only.

335

333

332

334

326

０８／０６／０２　２０：４０：５７　３１ＳＪＣ６３０　０４２７　

2009 ridgeline - service express · pdf file2009 ridgeline owner’s manual ... your...

Documents